Wednesday, August21, 2019 L-36.com

Raymarine C Series Widescr User Refece Guide 81312 1



Note:

This is the new page for displaying documents. It allows documents to display on devices without pdf viewers specifically mobile devices, a new Google requirement. Note also that some documents have blank pages. Just click on "Next Page" if that happens.
Previous Page    Next Page Go to page number Note: Page number may not agree with index page numbers


Previous Page    Next Page
Go to page number
Note: Page number may not agree with index page numbers

PDF to Text.

C-Series Widescreen
Multifunction Display

User reference handbook


C90W, C120W and C140W models
Trademarks and registered trademarks
Autohelm, HSB, RayTech Navigator, Sail Pilot, SeaTalk and Sportpilot are UK registered trademarks of Raymarine UK Limited.
Pathfinder and Raymarine are UK registered trademarks of Raymarine Holdings Limited. 45STV, 60STV, AST, Autoadapt, Auto GST,
AutoSeastate, AutoTrim, Bidata, G Series, HDFI, LifeTag, Marine Intelligence, Maxiview, On Board, Raychart, Raynav, Raypilot, RayTalk,
Raystar, ST40, ST60+, Seaclutter, Smart Route, Tridata, UniControl and Waypoint Navigation are trademarks of Raymarine UK Limited.
All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright ©2008 Raymarine UK Ltd. All rights reserved.




ENGLISH
Document number: 81312-1
Date: November 2008
Contents
Chapter 1 Important Information............................... 9                      3.5 Using the cursor........................................................ 20
Safety notices...................................................................9    3.6 Navigating pages and menus..................................... 21
TFT LCD Displays .......................................................... 10        3.7 Initial setup ............................................................... 25
Water ingress ................................................................. 10
                                                                                      Chapter 4 Managing display data ........................... 33
Disclaimers .................................................................... 10
                                                                                      4.1 CompactFlash cards overview ................................... 34
CompactFlash cards ....................................................... 11
                                                                                      4.2 Writing and retrieving data ......................................... 36
EMC conformance .......................................................... 11
                                                                                      4.3 Transferring data using a PC ..................................... 37
Suppression ferrites ........................................................ 11
                                                                                      4.4 Operating a networked display ................................... 37
Connections to other equipment ...................................... 11
Declaration of conformity................................................. 11         Chapter 5 Using waypoints ..................................... 39
Product disposal ............................................................. 12     5.1 Waypoints ................................................................ 40
Warranty registration....................................................... 12       5.2 How waypoints are shown in different
IMO and SOLAS............................................................. 12                applications....................................................... 41
Technical accuracy ......................................................... 12       5.3 Waypoint placement .................................................. 42
                                                                                      5.4 Displaying the waypoint list ........................................ 42
Chapter 2 Handbook information............................ 13                         5.5 Waypoint navigation .................................................. 43
2.1 User reference handbook information ......................... 14                  5.6 Editing a waypoint ..................................................... 44
2.2 About this manual ..................................................... 14        5.7 Waypoint groups ....................................................... 46
Chapter 3 Getting started ........................................ 15                 5.8 Password protecting your waypoints........................... 47
3.1 Multifunction display system integration ...................... 16                Chapter 6 Using the chart........................................ 49
3.2 Powering the display on/off ........................................ 18           6.1 Chart application overview ......................................... 50
3.3 Controls.................................................................... 19   6.2 Ensure safe navigation .............................................. 50
3.4 Using buttons and softkeys ........................................ 20            6.3 Using the chart safely ................................................ 51

                                                                                                                                                                        5
6.4 What the chart displays ............................................. 51          9.2 Radar scanner power modes ................................... 100
6.5 Chart cards............................................................... 52     9.3 Radar range and image quality ................................ 101
6.6 Chart datum.............................................................. 52      9.4 Radar display overview ........................................... 104
6.7 Chart setup............................................................... 53     9.5 Dual range radar operation (digital scanners
6.8 Moving around the chart ............................................ 59                    only) ............................................................... 105
6.9 Chart presentation..................................................... 60        9.6 Radar mode and orientation..................................... 106
6.10 Locating your vessel on the chart display .................. 72                  9.7 Radar tuning -- DIGITAL scanners .......................... 109
6.11 Waypoints ............................................................... 73     9.8 Radar tuning -- ANALOG scanners ......................... 114
6.12 Routes.................................................................... 75    9.9 Waypoints .............................................................. 120
6.13 Tracks .................................................................... 82   9.10 Using radar to measure distances, ranges, and
                                                                                               bearings ......................................................... 121
6.14 Measuring distances and bearings ........................... 84
                                                                                      9.11 Using radar to track targets and avoid
Chapter 7 Using the 3D chart .................................. 85                            collisions......................................................... 124
                                                                                      9.12 Radar alarms ........................................................ 128
7.1 3D chart overview ..................................................... 86
                                                                                      9.13 Setting up your radar ............................................. 129
7.2 3D chart setup .......................................................... 87
7.3 3D chart cards .......................................................... 88      Chapter 10 Using AIS ............................................. 133
7.4 3D chart display overview .......................................... 88           10.1 AIS overview......................................................... 134
Chapter 8 Using autopilot control........................... 95                       10.2 AIS prerequisites................................................... 135
                                                                                      10.3 Classes of AIS data............................................... 136
8.1 Disengaging the autopilot in an emergency................. 96
                                                                                      10.4 Enabling or disabling AIS ....................................... 137
8.2 Autopilot control ........................................................ 96
                                                                                      10.5 Displaying AIS vectors........................................... 137
8.3 Autopilot control options ............................................ 98
                                                                                      10.6 AIS status symbols................................................ 138
8.4 Autopilot alarms ........................................................ 98
                                                                                      10.7 AIS silent mode..................................................... 138
Chapter 9 Using radar .............................................. 99               10.8 Viewing AIS target information ............................... 139
9.1 Radar overview....................................................... 100         10.9 Using AIS to avoid collisions .................................. 140

6                                                                                                                                    C-Series Widescreen user reference
10.10 AIS options ......................................................... 141   Chapter 14 Using the data application ................. 175
10.11 AIS alarms .......................................................... 142   14.1 Data application overview ...................................... 176
10.12 Buddy tracking .................................................... 142     14.2 Pre-configured data in the data application ............. 176
                                                                                  14.3 Customizing the data application ............................ 178
Chapter 11 Using the Course Deviation
        Indicator .................................................... 145        Chapter 15 Using the weather application
11.1 Course Deviation Indicator overview ....................... 146                      (North America only)................................ 179
11.2 Selecting the CDI application.................................. 146          15.1 Weather application overview................................. 180
11.3 Using the CDI Application ...................................... 147         15.2 Weather application setup...................................... 180
                                                                                  15.3 Weather application display overview ..................... 181
Chapter 12 Using the fishfinder ............................ 149
                                                                                  15.4 Weather map navigation ........................................ 185
12.1 Fishfinder introduction ........................................... 150
                                                                                  15.5 Weather reports .................................................... 185
12.2 The sonar image ................................................... 151
                                                                                  15.6 Storm tracking....................................................... 186
12.3 Fishfinder presets.................................................. 153
                                                                                  15.7 Animated weather graphics.................................... 187
12.4 Fishfinder display modes ....................................... 154
12.5 Fishfinder range .................................................... 157    Chapter 16 Using Sirius satellite radio (North
12.6 Fishfinder presentation options............................... 159                   America only) ........................................... 189
12.7 Fishfinder waypoints.............................................. 164       16.1 Sirius radio overview ............................................. 190
12.8 Fishfinder alarms................................................... 165     16.2 Displaying the Sirius radio application..................... 190
12.9 Setting up your fishfinder ....................................... 166       16.3 Sirius radio basic operations .................................. 191
                                                                                  16.4 Sirius radio presets................................................ 192
Chapter 13 Using the engine monitor................... 171
                                                                                  16.5 Favorite Sirius radio song alerts ............................. 193
13.1 Engine monitor overview........................................ 172          16.6 Sirius radio parental locking ................................... 194
13.2 Displaying the engine monitor application ............... 172
13.3 Setting up the engine monitor application................ 173                Chapter 17 Using Navtex ....................................... 195
13.4 Changing what the engine monitor displays ............ 173                   17.1 Navtex overview.................................................... 196
13.5 Silencing engine monitor alarms............................. 174             17.2 Navtex setup......................................................... 196
                                                                                                                                                              7
17.3 Viewing and Managing Navtex Messages ............... 197                       22.3 Navionics support.................................................. 219

Chapter 18 Using video.......................................... 199
18.1 Video application overview..................................... 200
18.2 Displaying the video application ............................. 201
18.3 Changing the video aspect ratio ............................. 201
18.4 Adjusting the video picture ..................................... 202

Chapter 19 DSC VHF radio integration................. 203
19.1 Using a DSC VHF radio with your display ............... 204
19.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration....................... 205

Chapter 20 Customizing your display .................. 207
20.1 Customizing page sets .......................................... 208
20.2 Customizing the databar ........................................ 209

Chapter 21 Maintaining your display.................... 211
21.1 Servicing and safety .............................................. 212
21.2 Routine equipment checks..................................... 212
21.3 Cleaning ............................................................... 213
21.4 Cleaning the display case ...................................... 213
21.5 Cleaning the display screen ................................... 214
21.6 Resetting your display ........................................... 214

Chapter 22 Technical support ............................... 217
22.1 Raymarine technical support .................................. 218
22.2 Sirius support........................................................ 218

8                                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 1: Important Information                                          Warning: High voltages
                                                                          This product contains high voltages. Do NOT remove
                                                                          any covers or otherwise attempt to access internal
Safety notices                                                            components, unless specifically instructed in this
                                                                          document.
               Warning: Ensure safe navigation
               This product (including the electronic charts) is          Warning: Sonar operation
               intended for use only as an aid to navigation. It is
               designed to facilitate the use of official government      · NEVER operate the sounder with the boat out of
               charts, NOT REPLACE THEM. Only official                      the water.
               government charts and notices to mariners contain all      · NEVER touch the transducer face when the sounder
               the current information needed for safe navigation,          is powered on.
               and the captain is responsible for their prudent use. It
               is the user's responsibility to use official government    · SWITCH OFF the sounder if divers are likely to be
               charts, notices to mariners, caution and proper              within 25 ft (5 m) of the transducer.
               navigational skill when operating this or any other
               Raymarine product.
                                                                          Warning: Radar scanner safety
               Warning: Product installation and                          Before rotating the radar scanner, ensure all personnel
                                                                          are clear.
               operation
               This product must be installed and operated in
               accordance with the Raymarine instructions provided.       Warning: Radar transmission safety
               Failure to do so could result in personal injury, damage   The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy.
               to your boat and/or poor product performance.              Ensure all personnel are clear of the scanner when
                                                                          the radar is transmitting.
               Warning: Product installation
               This equipment must be installed in accordance with
               the Raymarine instructions provided. Failure to do so
               could result in poor product performance, personal
               injury, and/or damage to the vessel.



Important Information                                                                                                               9
     Caution: Care of chart cards                           TFT LCD Displays
     To avoid irreparable damage to and/or loss of data     The colors of the display may seem to vary when viewed against
     from chart cards:                                      a colored background or in colored light. This is a perfectly normal
                                                            effect that can be seen with all color Liquid Crystal Displays (LCDs).
     · Ensure that chart cards are fitted the correct way
       around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.    In common with all Thin Film Transistor (TFT) LCD units, the screen
                                                            may exhibit a few (less than 7) wrongly illuminated pixels. These
     · DO NOT save data (waypoints, routes, and so          may appear as black pixels in a light area of the screen or as colored
       on) to a Navionics chart card, as the charts may     pixels in black areas.
       be overwritten.
     · DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a
       screwdriver or pliers to remove a chart card.        Water ingress
     · DO NOT remove a chart card while information
       is being written to or read from it.                 As it exceeds the water proof rating capacity outlined by standards
                                                            IPX6, subjecting any Raymarine equipment to commercial
                                                            high pressure washing equipment may cause water intrusion
     Caution: Ensure chart card door is                     and subsequent equipment failure. Raymarine will not warrant
                                                            equipment subjected to high pressure washing.
     securely closed
     To prevent water ingress and consequent damage
     to the display, ensure that the chart card door is     Disclaimers
     firmly closed. This can be confirmed by an audible
     click.                                                 This product (including the electronic charts) is intended to be used
                                                            only as an aid to navigation. It is designed to facilitate use of official
                                                            government charts, not replace them. Only official government
     Caution: Cleaning                                      charts and notices to mariners contain all the current information
     When cleaning this product do NOT use acid,            needed for safe navigation, and the captain is responsible for their
     ammonia-based or abrasive products, and do NOT         prudent use. It is the user's responsibility to use official government
     use high pressure washing (jet wash) equipment.        charts, notices to mariners, caution and proper navigational skill
                                                            when operating this or any other Raymarine product. This product
                                                            supports electronic charts provided by third party data suppliers
                                                            which may be embedded or stored on memory card. Use of such
                                                            charts is subject to the supplier's End-User Licence Agreement
                                                            included in the documentation for this product or supplied with the
                                                            memory card (as applicable).

10                                                                                                    C-Series Widescreen user reference
Raymarine does not warrant that this product is error-free or that it    Correct installation is required to ensure that EMC performance is
is compatible with products manufactured by any person or entity         not compromised.
other than Raymarine.
This product uses digital chart data, and electronic information from
the Global Positioning System (GPS) which may contain errors.            Suppression ferrites
Raymarine does not warrant the accuracy of such information and
you are advised that errors in such information may cause the            Do not remove ferrite
product to malfunction. Raymarine is not responsible for damages
or injuries caused by your use or inability to use the product, by the   Raymarine cables may be fitted with suppression ferrites. These
interaction of the product with products manufactured by others, or      are important for correct EMC performance. If a ferrite has to be
by errors in chart data or information utilized by the product and       removed for any purpose (e.g. installation or maintenance), it must
supplied by third parties.                                               be replaced in the original position before the product is used.
                                                                         Use only ferrites of the correct type, supplied by Raymarine
                                                                         authorized dealers.
CompactFlash cards
Navionics chart cards                                                    Connections to other equipment
The Display is pre-loaded with Navionics chart data. If you wish to
use different chart data, you can insert Navionics chart cards into      Requirement for ferrites on non-Raymarine cables
the CompactFlash card slot on the unit.                                  If your Raymarine equipment is to be connected to other equipment
                                                                         using a cable not supplied by Raymarine, a suppression ferrite
Use branded chart cards                                                  MUST always be attached to the cable near the Raymarine unit.
When archiving data, Raymarine recommends the use of SanDisk
CF memory cards. Other brands of CF memory card may not work
in your unit.
                                                                         Declaration of conformity
                                                                         Raymarine Ltd. declares that the C-Series Multifunction Displays
EMC conformance                                                          are in compliance with the essential requirements of EMC directive
                                                                         2004/108/EC.
Basic EMC conformance statement.
Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations for use in the
recreational marine environment.


Important Information                                                                                                                         11
The original Declaration of Conformity certificate may be viewed on       Technical accuracy
the relevant product page at www.raymarine.com
                                                                          To the best of our knowledge, the information in this document was
                                                                          correct at the time it was produced. However, Raymarine cannot
                                                                          accept liability for any inaccuracies or omissions it may contain. In
Product disposal                                                          addition, our policy of continuous product improvement may change
                                                                          specifications without notice. As a result, Raymarine cannot accept
Dispose this product in accordance with the WEEE Directive.               liability for any differences between the product and this document.



       The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Directive requires the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. Whilst the WEEE Directive does not apply to some
Raymarine products, we support its policy and ask you to be aware
of how to dispose of this product.



Warranty registration
To register your Raymarine product ownership, please take a few
minutes to fill out the warranty registration card found in the box, or
visit www.raymarine.com and register on-line.
It is important that you register your product to receive full warranty
benefits. Your unit package includes a bar code label indicating the
serial number of the unit. You should stick this label to the warranty
registration card.



IMO and SOLAS
The equipment described within this document is intended for use
on leisure marine boats and workboats not covered by International
Maritime Organization (IMO) and Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS)
Carriage Regulations.

12                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 2: Handbook information

Chapter contents
·    2.1 User reference handbook information on page 14
·    2.2 About this manual on page 14




Handbook information                                      13
2.1 User reference handbook information                              2.2 About this manual
This handbook contains important information on using the C-Series   This manual describes how to operate your multifunction display in
Widescreen range of multifunction displays.                          conjunction with Navionics cartography.
The handbook is for use with the following models:                   It assumes that all peripheral equipment to be operated with it is
                                                                     compatible and has been correctly installed. This manual is intended
· C90W Widescreen Multifunction Display                              for users of varying marine abilities, but assumes a general level of
· C120W Widescreen Multifunction Display                             knowledge of display use, nautical terminology and practices.

· C140W Widescreen Multifunction Display


C-Series handbooks
The C-Series Widescreen Multifunction Display has the following
handbooks available.
All documents are available to download as PDFs from
www.raymarine.com

C-Series handbooks

 Description                      Part number
 Installation and commissioning   87101
 instructions
 Operating instructions (quick    86135
 reference)
 User reference handbook          81312

Additional handbooks
 Description                      Part number
 SeaTalkng reference manual       81300



14                                                                                                          C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 3: Getting started

Chapter contents
·    3.1 Multifunction display system integration on page 16
·    3.2 Powering the display on/off on page 18
·    3.3 Controls on page 19
·    3.4 Using buttons and softkeys on page 20
·    3.5 Using the cursor on page 20
·    3.6 Navigating pages and menus on page 21
·    3.7 Initial setup on page 25




Getting started                                                15
3.1 Multifunction display system                                                                                               Your multifunction display uses a number of protocols to transfer
                                                                                                                               data between the various devices in your networked system. The
integration                                                                                                                    following table details which devices may be connected to your
                                                                                                                               display, and the type of connectivity (in terms of protocols and
You can connect a number of external devices to your multifunction                                                             physical interfaces) that they use to exchange data with the display:
display, providing additional features and functions.
The following diagram illustrates the various external devices that                                                             Device Type               Suitable Devices           Connectivity
can be connected to your multifunction display:
                                                                                                                                Radar                     · ONE 4 kilowatt Digital   SeaTalkhs
                                                          Instruments
                                                                                                                                                            Radome Scanner,
                                                                                       Video/Camera                                                         OR
                                    Autopilot                                                                                                             · ONE 4 kilowatt HD
                                                                                                                                                            Digital Open Array
                                                                                                                                                            Scanner, OR
                                                                                              External GPS
                                                                                                                                                          · ONE 4 kilowatt SHD
                                                                                                                                                            Digital Open Array
                                                        C-Series display                                                                                    Scanner, OR
     DSC VHF                                                                           Digital Open
                                                                                                  Array radar scanner                                     · ONE 12 kilowatt SHD
                11.18.02




                       RAY240
                                                                                                                                                            Digital Open Array
                                                                                                                                                            Scanner
        MENU                 OK
                  CH

         16/9               HI/LO

                 WX
         SCAN              WATCH


                  SQ




                                                                                                    or                                                     Note: HD and
                                                                                         Digital Radome scanner                                            SHD Open Array
     AIS receiver                                                                                                                                          Scanners must
                                                                                                                                                           be using software
                                                                                                                                                           version V2.23 or
 Personal                            Fishfinder    SeaTalkhs                 Additional                                                                    later.
 Computer                           DSM 30 & 300   switch                  C-Series display      Weather receiver

                                                                                                                                Fishfinder                · ONE DSM 30, OR           SeaTalkhs
                                                                                                                    D11522_1




                                                                                                                                                          · ONE DSM 300
                                                                                                                                Cartography -- included   Embedded (internal)        Internal storage
                                                                                                                                                          Navionics cartography



16                                                                                                                                                                          C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Device Type                Suitable Devices           Connectivity               Device Type        Suitable Devices   Connectivity
 Cartography -- optional    External Navionics         CompactFlash card slot     Raytech charting   Raytech software   SeaTalkhs
                            CompactFlash chart                                    software           version V6.1
                            card (including Platinum
                            level)
 Sirius Weather/Audio       Sirius SR100 only          SeaTalkhs
 AIS                        AIS 250, AIS 500, or       NMEA 0183
                            AIS Class A or Class B
                            receiver/transceiver
 Navtex                     Navtex Receiver            NMEA 0183 (Navtex
                                                       protocol)
 Fast Heading Sensor        Fast Heading Sensor        NMEA 0183
 GPS -- external            Raystar125 GPS or          SeaTalk, SeaTalkng, or
                            third-party external GPS   NMEA 0183
                            receiver
 Instruments                All current Raymarine      SeaTalk, SeaTalkng
                            instruments
 Autopilot -- Raymarine     All current Raymarine      SeaTalk, SeaTalkng
                            autopilots
 Autopilot -- third party   Third-party autopilots     NMEA 0183 (waypoint
                                                       and bearing information)
 VHF radio                  Raymarine DSC VHF          NMEA 0183, SeaTalk
                            radios
 Additional Multifunction   ONE C90W, C120W, or        SeaTalk, SeaTalkhs,
 Display                    C140W                      SeaTalkng
 Video/camera               Composite PAL or NTSC      BNC connector
                            video source



Getting started                                                                                                                        17
3.2 Powering the display on/off

Powering the display on
1. Press and hold the POWER button until the Raymarine logo
   appears.
2. Press OK to acknowledge the warning window.


Powering the Display Off
1. Press and hold the POWER button until the countdown reaches
   zero.

 Note: If the POWER button is released before the countdown
 reaches zero, the power off is cancelled.




18                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
3.3 Controls
   5 ACTIVE                              1         Chart card slot                                             2 PAGE
     Selects which of the split windows            Open the card reader door to                                  Press to display the available page
     is active.The selected window is              insert or remove CompactFlash                                 softkeys for the current page set.
     outlined in red, and the associated           cards, which are used for                                     Press and hold to access the Page
     softkeys displayed.                           upgrading cartography,                                        Setup menu.
                                                   and archiving waypoint,                                     3 WPTS/MOB
   7 MENU                                          route and other data.                                         Press and release to show the waypoint
     Press to access the                                                                                         softkeys. Press again to place a waypoint
     set up menus.                                                                                               at your vessel's position. Press and hold
                                                                                                                 to place a Man Overboard (MOB) marker
                                                                                                                 at your current position.
                                                                                                   1           4 RANGE
                                                                                                           2     Press to change the display scale
                                                                                                                 so that a smaller or larger area can
                                                                                                           3
                                                                                                                 be seen on the screen.
                                                                                                           4   6 DATA
                                                                                                                 Press to access the archive and transfer
                                                                                                                                                      ,
                                                                                                                 and databar options.

                                                                                              5            6   8 CANCEL
                                                                                                                 Press to quit the selected on-screen option
                                                                                                                 when editing data, or to return to a previous
                                                                                               7           8     softkey or menu level.
                                                                                                               9 Unicontrol TM
                                                                                                       9
                                                                                                                 The smooth inner ring is the
                                                                                                                                           TRACKP   AD,
                                                                                                                 which controls the on-screen cursor and
                  11                                                                                             scrolls through menus.The outer ring is
                                                                                                                 the ROT  ARY CONTROL, which is used to
                                                                                                                 adjust values. In the middle of the Unicontrol
                                                                                                                 is the OK button, which is used to select options.
                                                                                                               11 POWER
                                                        10                                                        Press once to switch the unit ON. Press again
                                                     Softkeys                                                     to access the backlight adjustment and scanner
                       Press to select the corresponding function identified by the on-screen label.              power controls. Press and hold to switch the
                                                                                                                  unit OFF.
Getting started                                                                                                                                                    19
3.4 Using buttons and softkeys                                                                                            3.5 Using the cursor
The following diagram shows you how to select functions using the                                                         In the Chart and Radar applications, the cursor is used to move
buttons and softkeys:                                                                                                     around the screen:

                                                                                                PAGE                                               The cursor appears on the screen as a white cross.
       Buttons
         Access system functions or change what you see on-screen.                             WPTS
                                                                                               MOB




                                                                                                                                       D7366_3
         Within the text of this document they are written in bold capitals
         e.g. WPTS/MOB.
         Press and hold to access short cuts.
                                                                                      ACTIVE   DATA


                                                                                                                                                   If the cursor has not been moved for a short period of time,
                                                                                                                                                   it changes to a circle with a cross in it, to make it easier to
                                                                                                                                                   locate on the screen.




                                                                                                                                         D7368_2
     Softkeys
        They change depending on          WA
                                           YPOINT
                                                A
                                           CURSOR
                                                 T     WA
                                                        YPOINT
                                                             A
                                                        VESSEL
                                                              T    WA
                                                                    YPOINT
                                                                   LAT/LONG
                                                                           A
                                                                          ...
                                                                             T    GOTO WAYPOINT REVIEW
                                                                                    OPTIONS
                                                                                          ...     WA
                                                                                                     ANDEDIT
                                                                                                    YPOINTS
        application or function
        being performed.
        Press the corresponding key
                                                                                                                                                   The cursor is context-sensitive - when it is placed over an
        (below the screen) to select.                                                                                                              object e.g. a waypoint or chart feature, it changes color and a
        Further softkeys may be                                                                                                                    label or information associated with the object is displayed.




                                                                                                                                         D7369-2
        displayed.                                                                                                               WPT               When you place the cursor over certain items, the soft keys
        If a key has several options,                             SET DEF
                                                                       AULT SYM    WAYPOINT    VIEWANDEDIT
        each press will highlight the
                                        ERASE
                                            WAYPOINT   SOR
                                                         T LIST
                                                                    & GROUP...     GROUPS
                                                                                        ...      DET
                                                                                                   AILS
                                                                                                      ...                                          change to enable you to access related operations.
        next option.
        If a key displays a single
        value or a slider above, use
        the rotary control to adjust.
        Within the text of this                                                                                           List of cursor labels
        document they are written                                 SET UP DEF
                                                                          AUL
                                                                  SYMB GROUP
                                                                             T
                                                                                                EDIT DEF
                                                                                                      AULT
        in capitals e.g. SORT LIST.
                                                                                                                           Label                            Feature                      Application
                                                                                                                           A/B                              Ruler line                   Chart
                                        Example:
                                        The example above shows the series of button and softk
                                                                                            ey presses                     AIS                              AIS target                   Chart
                                                                                                               D11529-1




                                        required to change the w
                                                               aypoint default symbol or group
                                                                                             .
                                                                                                                           COG                              Course Over Ground           Chart
                                                                                                                                                            vector
 Note: To disable the audible "beep" that you hear when a button                                                           CTR                              Center of radar              Radar
 or softkey is pressed, go to Menu > Display Setup > Key Beep.

20                                                                                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Label            Feature                 Application    3.6 Navigating pages and menus
 FLT              Floating EBL/VRM        Radar
 GRD              Guard zone              Radar          Displaying applications
 HDG              Heading vector          Chart          The various applications that make up your multifunction display
                                                         are shown in a series of screens known as page sets. There are
 MARPA            MARPA target            Radar          4 pre-configured and one empty page set to choose from. Each
 MOB              Man Over Board marker   Chart, Radar   page set contains 5 pages. These pages are made up of 1, 2, 3 or
                                                         4 windows combined in various formats. Each window can display
 POS              Vessel's position       Chart          an application:
 RTE              Route leg               Chart          Pa ge set                                           Engine
                                                                                  Chart   CDI   Fishfinder   monitor Radar   Data
 SHM              Ship's Heading Marker   Radar
 TIDE             Tide indicator          Chart
 VRM/EBL          VRM and EBL, 1 or 2     Radar
 WIND             Wind indicator          Chart
                                                                   Pa ge                                       Window
 WPT              Waypoint                Chart, Radar        (consists of 1,2,




                                                                                                                                    D8928_1
                                                              3 or 4 windows)


                                                         If required, you can change the combination and layout of these
                                                         page sets to meet your particular needs.

                                                         Selecting a page set and application page
                                                         1. Press and hold the PAGE button until the Select Page Set dialog
                                                            appears.
                                                         2. Using the trackpad, highlight the required page set.
                                                         3. Press the OK button to select the highlighted page set. An
                                                            application page from that page set is displayed.




Getting started                                                                                                                               21
4. Press the PAGE button repeatedly to toggle between the
   available application pages in the page set. Alternatively, use the
   appropriate softkey to select the relevant application page.

Selecting an application window
1. When more than one application is displayed at any one time,
   the active application window is highlighted with a red border:
2. Press the ACTIVE button to move the red border to another
   window on the screen.
3. Press and hold the ACTIVE button to switch the currently
   highlighted window to full-screen mode.
4. Press and hold the ACTIVE button to return the screen to
   split-window mode.




22                                                                       C-Series Widescreen user reference
Screen information

                                                         Status bar                          Databar                                 Status icons
                                                         ·   Gives information specific to   ·   Gives information associated with   Confirm status of
                                                             each application.                   your vessel or the environment.     Sounder,GPS, AIS and
                                                         ·   Cannot be edited or moved.      ·   Customizable content.               Autopilot.
                                                                                             ·   Vertical or horizontal format.
                                                                                             ·   Display or hide.
                                                                                             ·   Normal or large size.




       Database lists
       ·   Include information you have added to the
           display's memory, such as waypoints.
       ·   Highlight an entry using trackpad or rotary
           control to display related information.
       ·   Editable using softkeys.



       Pop-up messages
       ·   Alert you to a situation, such as an alarm,
           or unavailable function
                                 .
       ·   Not editable.
       ·   May require a response. For example,
           ACKNOWLEDGE to silence alarms    .


       Dialog boxes
       Enable data to be edited or entered into a
       store/list e.g. editing a waypoint.




Getting started                                                                                                                                             23
Editing dialog box information                                               Accessing a menu

1. In the dialog box, use the rotary control to select the field you         1. Press the MENU button.
   want to edit.                                                             2. Using the trackpad or rotary control, highlight the relevant menu
2. Press the EDIT... softkey.                                                   item.
3. Use the trackpad and rotary control to edit the information in            3. Press the trackpad right to select the menu item.
   the field.                                                                4. Repeat Steps 2 to 3 for navigating sub-menus.
4. Click OK to apply any changes.                                            5. Once you have selected the relevant option(s), press the OK
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 until all the required details have been                 button to keep any changes and return to the application.
   changed.

 Note: Entries in dialog boxes are not case sensitive, so character          Status icons
 text can be entered in upper or lower case.
                                                                             The status icons on the databar confirm whether the appropriate
 Note: Enable the Extended Character Set in the System Setup                 connections to your multifunction display have been made.
 Menu if you need to use special or accented characters.
                                                                              Status
                                                                              icon         Description
Using menus                                                                                The boat and fish icon indicates the current status of your
                                                                                           fishfinder:
Menus enable you to configure your system to your particular needs.
                                                                                           · Icon animated: connection to a DSM has been successful.
Whenever the Menu button is pressed, the Setup menu is displayed.
It contains a list of all the menus available for the active application,                  · Icon static: the DSM is connected but not transmitting.
together with system-wide menus:                                                           · Icon greyed-out: no DSM is connected.
                                                       Setup                               The satellite icon indicates the current status of your GPS:
       Menus for the active   Ra d ar Setup ...
       application
                              GPS Status...                                                · Fix: your unit is successfully connected to a GPS receiver.
       External equipment/    Compass Setup      ...
       instruments            AIS La yer Status...                                         · No Fix: your unit has been unable to connect to a suitable
                              S ys tem Setup ...                                             GPS receiver.
                              Alarm Setup ...
                              Displa y Setup ...
       System-wide menus      Databar Set...
                              Select P age Setup ...
                              S ys tem Diagnostics...
                                                                   D7370_2




                              Re m ove CF Card




24                                                                                                                       C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Status                                                                             3.7 Initial setup
 icon             Description
                  The scanner icon indicates the current status of your radar       Initial setup procedures
                  scanner:
                                                                                    A number of tasks must be completed before you use your display
                  · Icon rotates: the scanner is transmitting (TRANSMIT/TX
                                                                                    for the first time.
                    mode).
                                                                                    When you first use your multifunction display after it has been
                  · Icon static: the scanner is powered on but is not currently     commissioned (see Installation Guide), we recommend that you
                    transmitting (STANDBY mode).                                    carry out the following:
                  · Icon greyed-out: this indicates that the scanner is currently
                                                                                    · Set the language, the date and time format and preferred units
                    powered off (OFF mode).
                                                                                      of measurement.
                  · Icon rotates and is then static: a power save mode in which
                                                                                    · Adjust the display lighting.
                    the scanner powers on/off intermittently (TIMED TRANSMIT
                    mode).                                                          Setting the language, date/time, and units of measurement
                  ----
                                                                                    1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                                    2. Using the trackpad, highlight the System Setup menu item.
 Note: There are also additional status icons for AIS and Autopilot
                                                                                    3. Press right on the trackpad to enter the System Setup menu.
 functionality. These icons are described in the respective
 chapters.                                                                          4. Using the trackpad, highlight the required setup item from the
                                                                                       menu.
                                                                                    5. Using the tackpad and rotary control, adjust the values for the
                                                                                       setup item.
                                                                                    6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each setup item (Language, Date/Time/
                                                                                       Units of Measurement) that you want to change.

                                                                                    Adjusting the display lighting
                                                                                    1. Press the POWER button once. The brightness level control is
                                                                                       displayed.
                                                                                    2. Using the rotary control, adjust the brightness level as required.




Getting started                                                                                                                                         25
3. To switch the color palatte between Day (very bright) and Night         without data from a GPS antenna, radar scanner, fishfinder or AIS
   (dark) modes, press the PALETTE softkey and select the DAY              receiver.
   or NIGHT option.                                                        The Simulator mode is switched on/off in the System Setup Menu.
GPS receiver selection                                                     Once enabled, you can use the Simulator:

You must configure your multifunction display to use either the            · Before installation: Connect the display to a 12V DC power
internal GPS receiver, or an externally-connected GPS receiver.              supply, fused at 1 amp by attaching the red core from the power
                                                                             lead to positive (+) and the black core to negative (-).
Your multifunction display has a built-in (internal) GPS receiver. It is
high-sensitivity, allowing reliable performance even with the display      · After installation: Whilst in a marina or at anchor.
unit mounted below decks or in any orientation. By default, your
multifunction display will use the built-in GPS receiver.                   Note: Incoming AIS safety messages cannot be displayed while
                                                                            the display is in Simulator mode.
However, you may prefer to connect your multifunction display to
an external GPS receiver. In this case, you must configure your             Note: Any system settings made whilst in Simulator mode are not
multifunction display to use the external GPS receiver instead of           transmitted via SeaTalk to other equipment.
the internal GPS receiver.

GPS Selection for Multiple Displays                                        Enabling the simulator mode
When using multiple multifunction displays, ensure that you use the        1. Press Menu.
GPS receiver with the best signal.                                         2. Select the System Setup menu.
You must disable the internal GPS receiver on any additional               3. Select the Simulator item, and change its value to On.
displays you have connected to your master multifunction display.
If you are using an external GPS receiver, you must disable the
internal GPS receiver on ALL displays.                                     System setup menu
Switching between internal and external GPS receivers                      The following table describes the various options in the System
                                                                           Setup menu for your multifunction display.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the trackpad, select the Internal GPS menu item.                   Menu item               Description              Options
3. Using the trackpad, select the ON option to use the internal
   GPS, or the OFF option to use an external GPS.                           Position Mode           Determines how           · Lat/Long (default)
                                                                                                    positioning data is
4. Press the OK button.                                                                             displayed -- as          · TDs
                                                                                                    Latitude/Longitude
Simulator mode
                                                                                                    coordinates, or Loran
The Simulator mode enables you to practice operating your display                                   TDs.

26                                                                                                                   C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu item        Description                Options              Menu item          Description                 Options
 TD Setup         When the Position Mode     Chain                MOB Data Type      Determines whether          · Dead
                  (see above) is set to                                              positional data or dead       Reckoning (default)
                  TDs, you can specify the   · Various options,                      reckoning is displayed.
                  chain identifier, slave,     depending on                          Assuming that your          · Position
                  and ASF values.              cartography.                          vessel and the Man
                                             Slave 1/2                               Over Board (MOB) are
                                                                                     subject to the same tide
                                             · Various options,                      and wind effects, the
                                               depending on                          dead reckoning setting
                                               cartography.                          normally gives a more
                                                                                     accurate course.
                                             ASF 1/2
                                                                  Variation Source   This setting                · Auto (compensation
                                             · ­09.9 to +09.9                        compensates for the           value displayed in
 Simulator        Enables or disables        · OFF (default)                         naturally occuring offset     brackets) (default)
                  simulator mode,                                                    of the earth's magnetic
                                             · ON                                    field. When set to Auto,    · Manual
                  which allows you to
                  practice operating your                                            the system automatically
                                             · DEMO                                  compensates,
                  multifunction display
                  without data from a                                                and displays the
                  GPS antenna, fishfinder                                            compensation value
                  (DSM sonar), or any                                                in brackets. To enter
                  other external unit.                                               your own compensation
                                                                                     value, use the Manual
 Bearing Mode     Determines how all         · True (default)                        option, then specify the
                  bearing and heading                                                value using the Manual
                  data is displayed in.      · Magnetic                              Variation setting (see
                  This does not affect                                               below).
                  how the chart or radar
                  displays are drawn.




Getting started                                                                                                                          27
 Menu item            Description                 Options                  Menu item           Description               Options
 Manual Variation     When the Variation          · 0 degrees              Settings Reset      Resets all system setup   Reset Defaults
                      Source menu item is           East (default)                             menus, including page     confirmation
                      set to Manual (see                                                       sets and the databar,
                      above), you use the         · Range: 0 to 30                             to the factory default    · YES
                      Manual Variation              degrees East or West                       settings. Waypoints,      · NO
                      setting to specify the      ·                                            routes and tracks are
                      compensation value that                                                  NOT deleted.
                      you want to use. This
                      value is also transmitted                            Settings and Data   Resets all system setup   Factory Reset
                      to any other connected                               Reset               menus, including page     confirmation
                      SeaTalk instruments.                                                     sets and the databar,
                                                                                               to the factory default    · YES
 Language             Determines the              Options vary depending                       settings. Waypoints,      · NO
                      language that will be       on the geographic                            routes and tracks ARE
                      used for all on-screen      location where you                           deleted.
                      text, labels, menus and     purchased your
                      options.                    multifunction display.                        Note: For systems
                                                                                                using multiple
 Extended Character   Determines whether          · OFF (default)                               multifunction displays
 Set                  additional accented                                                       (networked displays),
                      characters are made         · ON
                                                                                                the complete system
                      available when you are                                                    database is deleted
                      entering text.                                                            on the data master
                                                                                                (primary display).
 Ground Trip Reset    Resets the chosen           · Ground Trip 1 Reset
                                                                                                Only the waypoints,
                      ground trip distance
                                                  · Ground Trip 2 Reset                         routes and tracks
                      counter to zero.
                                                                                                will be deleted
                                                  · Ground Trip 3 Reset                         from any additional
                                                  · Ground Trip 4 Reset                         multifunction
                                                                                                displays.




28                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu item         Description               Options                  Menu item            Description               Options
 Date/Time Setup   These options enable      Date Format                                    the units in Feet. If
                                                                                            the Distance unit is     Temperature Units
                   you to customize the
                   date and time format      · mm/dd/yy                                     set to Kilometers, the
                                                                                                                     · Fahrenheit (default)
                   to your requirements.                                                    system displays the
                                             · dd/mm/yy                                     units in Meters.         · Celsius
                   You can also specify
                   a local time offset       Time Format                                                             Pressure Units
                   from Universal Time
                   Constant (UTC), to        · 12hr                                                                  · Bar
                   compensate for any time   · 24hr
                   zone difference.                                                                                  · PSI (default)
                                             Local Time Offset                                                       · Kilopascals
                                             · ­013.0 to +013.0                                                      Volume Units
 Units Setup       Enables you to specify    Distance Units                                                          · US Gallons
                   the units used for
                   the following key         · Nautical                                                              · Imp (Imperial)
                   measurements:               Miles (default)                                                         Gallons (default)
                   · Distance                · Statute Miles                                                         · Liters
                   · Speed                   · Kilometers             System Integration   Determines the            Autopilot Control
                                             Speed Units                                   connection settings
                   · Depth                                                                 for external equipment.   · Disabled (default)
                   · Temperature             · Knots (default)                             The following items       · Enabled
                                                                                           are available in the
                   · Pressure                · mph (miles per hour)                        sub-menu:                 DSC Message
                   · Volume                  · kph (kilometers per                                                   · OFF (default)
                                                                                           · Autopilot Control
                                               hour)
                                                                                             -- If set to Enabled,
                    Note: If the                                                                                     · ON
                                             Depth Units                                     this option allows
                    Distance unit is                                                         you to control          SeaTalk Alarms
                    set to Nautical Miles    · Meters                                        certain aspects
                    or Statute Miles, and                                                    of a connected          · ON (default)
                    the data displayed       · Feet (default)
                                                                                             pilot control head,     · OFF
                    is less than 1 unit,     · Fathoms                                       such as sending
                    the system displays                                                      commands to engage      Data Master
                                                                                             and disengage the
Getting started                                                                                                                               29
 Menu item   Description                 Options               Menu item   Description                 Options
              autopilot. If set to                                           multifunction display
              Disabled, you will not     · ON (default)                      on the same network,      · RSD
              be able to control the                                         one of them must          · RTE
                                         · OFF
              autopilot from your                                            be set as the data
              multifunction display,     Bridge NMEA Heading                 master. When this         · TTM
              and all functions must                                         option is set to ON,
              be controlled from         · OFF (default)                                               · VHW
                                                                             the multifunction
              the pilot control head     · ON                                display you are           · VLW
              itself.                                                        currently using will
                                         SeaTalk2 Keyboard                   be set as the data        · WPL
             · DSC Message -- If
               set to ON, details                                            master.                   · VTG
                                         · OFF (default)
               of distress DSC                                             · Bridge NMEA               · ZDA
               messages from a           · ALL
                                                                             Heading -- If
               connected DSC VHF         · ONE                               set to ON, NMEA           NMEA Port Setting
               radio will be displayed                                       heading data will
               on your multifunction     NMEA Output Setup                   be bridged onto the       · NMEA 4800 (default)
               display. If set to OFF,                                       SeaTalk data bus,         · Navtex 4800
               the messages will         · APB
                                                                             and will be sent to
               NOT be displayed          · BWC                               all NMEA-connected        · Navtex 9600
               on your multifunction                                         devices. If set to OFF,
               display.                  · BWR                                                         · AIS 38400
                                                                             NMEA heading data
             · SeaTalk Alarms -- If      · DBT                               will NOT be bridged
               set to ON, all system                                         onto the SeaTalk
                                         · DPT                               bus. An example of a
               alarms generated
               by any connected                                              use for this setting is
                                         · GGA
               SeaTalk units will be                                         when using MARPA
               displayed on your         · GLL                               with an external
               multifunction display.                                        fast heading sensor,
                                         · MTW                               in which case you
               If set to OFF, the
               alarms will NOT be        · MWV                               should set this option
               displayed on your                                             to OFF to ensure that
                                         · RMA                               all NMEA-connected
               multifunction display.
                                                                             units receive heading
                                         · RMB
             · Data Alarms -- If you                                         data from the external
               have more than one        · RMC                               heading sensor.

30                                                                                           C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu item        Description                Options   Menu item           Description                 Options

                  · SeaTalk2 Keyboard                  Waypoint Password   This menu allows you        Enable Password
                    -- Set to ONE                      Setup               to enable password
                                                                           protection for waypoints,   · OFF (default)
                    or ALL if you
                    have a SeaTalk2                                        and to change the           · ON
                    keyboard connected.                                    password.
                    Otherwise, set to                                                                  Change Password
                    OFF.                                                                               · Displays Edit
                  · NMEA Output Setup                                                                    Waypoint Password
                    -- allows you to                                                                     dialog.
                    enable or disable
                    the individual NMEA
                    output "sentences" for
                    each NMEA port.
                  · NMEA Port Setting
                    -- Allows you
                    to specify the
                    appropriate port
                    speed for the
                    equipment connected
                    to each NMEA port.
                    When the Navtex
                    4800 or Navtex 9600
                    option is selected,
                    you will be able to
                    view the Navtex
                    message list.




Getting started                                                                                                              31
32   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 4: Managing display data

Chapter contents
·    4.1 CompactFlash cards overview on page 34
·    4.2 Writing and retrieving data on page 36
·    4.3 Transferring data using a PC on page 37
·    4.4 Operating a networked display on page 37




Managing display data                               33
4.1 CompactFlash cards overview                                                       Caution: Care of chart cards
CompactFlash cards enable you to use additional cartographic                          To avoid irreparable damage to and/or loss of data
information , and save and archive data.                                              from chart cards:
Their uses include:                                                                   · Ensure that chart cards are fitted the correct way
                                                                                        around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.
· Detailed cartographic information: Obtain detailed cartographic
  information of the area that you navigate using Navionics® chart                    · DO NOT save data (waypoints, routes, and so
  cards. To check the current availability of Navionics chart card                      on) to a Navionics chart card, as the charts may
  types, please visit www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it. The                        be overwritten.
  amount of cartographic detail shown varies for different areas
  and for different scales. The chart scale in use is indicated in the                · DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a
  status bar - the number represents the distance in nautical miles                     screwdriver or pliers to remove a chart card.
  from the top of the chart window to the bottom of the chart window.                 · DO NOT remove a chart card while information
· Archiving: To archive waypoints, routes and tracks.                                   is being written to or read from it.

· Saving: To save waypoint, route and track data for use by other
  equipment, such as a PC.
                                                                         Inserting a CompactFlash card
You can remove and insert cards while a chart is displayed provided
that you follow the correct procedure. The chart information is          1. Check that you are using the correct type of card (see Important
retained on-screen until the chartplotter redraws the screen; for           Information, at the beginning of this manual).
example, when you pan outside the current area, or use the Range         2. Open the chart card door, located on the front right of the display.
button to change the chart scale.
                                                                         3. Insert the card as shown in the diagram below, with the lip of the
                                                                            card facing outwards. It should position easily. If it does not, DO
                                                                            NOT force it, check the direction in which the lip is facing.
                                                                         4. Gently press the card all the way in to the card slot.
                                                                         5. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close
                                                                            the chart card door and press firmly until a click is heard.




34                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
                                                                            5. Press the card eject button.
                                                                            6. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close
                                                                               the chart card door and press firmly until a click is heard.
                                                                            7. Press OK.




                                                                 D11530-1




              Caution: Ensure chart card door is
              securely closed
              To prevent water ingress and consequent damage
              to the display, ensure that the chart card door is
              firmly closed. This can be confirmed by an audible
              click.



Removing a CompactFlash Card
1. If the multifunction display is powered on, press the MENU
   button. Otherwise, skip to Step 4.
2. Highlight the Remove CF Card menu option.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Remove CF Card menu option,
   then press the trackpad right to select it.
4. Open the chart card door, located on the front right of the display.

Managing display data                                                                                                                     35
4.2 Writing and retrieving data                                        3. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
                                                                       4. Press the RETRIEVE FROM CARD softkey.
You can transfer data between a number of devices to help you          5. Select the type of data that you want to retrieve (Waypoint,
backup and manage your waypoints, routes, and tracks.                     Route, or Track).
Your multifunction display can save up to 3000 waypoints, 150          6. To retrieve all items of that type of data, press the RETRIEVE
routes and 15 tracks in database lists. Once this number is               ALL softkey.
reached you will need to archive data to a CompactFlash card for       7. To retrieve an individual item of data, select the item from the list
safe-keeping or retrieval at a later date. Alternatively, you can         and press the RETRIEVE softkey.
transfer data to another instrument or PC using NMEA. When
navigation is active, you can also receive waypoints, routes and        Note: If the type of data you have selected already exists in the
tracks from a PC, SeaTalk and NMEA instruments.                         display's memory, use the softkeys to select a suitable action;
                                                                        retrieve as new data, replace existing data, or cancel.

Saving data to a CompactFlash card
 Note: Raymarine strongly recommends that you save data to             Erasing data from a CompactFlash card
 a separate CompactFlash card, and not to a Navionics card
                                                                       1. Insert the card in to the CompactFlash card slot.
 containing cartography.
                                                                       2. Press the DATA button.
1. Insert card in to the CompactFlash card slot                        3. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
2. Press the DATA button.                                              4. Press the ERASE FROM CARD softkey.
3. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.                             5. Use the SELECT LIST softkey to select the type of data you
                                                                          want to erase.
4. Press the SAVE TO CARD softkey.
                                                                       6. To erase all the data, press the ERASE ALL softkey.
5. Select the type of data that you want to save (Waypoint, Route,
   or Track).                                                          7. To erase an individual item of data from the list, highlight the
                                                                          relevant entry in the list and press the ERASE softkey.
6. To save all items of that type of data, press the SAVE ALL
   softkey.
7. To save an individual item of data, select the item from the list
   and press the SAVE softkey.


Retrieving data from a CompactFlash card
1. Insert card in to the CompactFlash card slot
2. Press the DATA button.

36                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
4.3 Transferring data using a PC                                       4.4 Operating a networked display
You can transfer waypoints or routes to and from your display and a    You can connect an additional multifunction display for a more
PC or instrument, using NMEA.                                          flexible and accessible system.
With the RayTech V6.0 (or later) software you can transfer waypoints   If you have multifunction displays connected together (using a
and routes via a CompactFlash memory card. Such transfers              crossover coupler or a SeaTalkhs switch), you can input, edit, and
require that the PC is connected to the display's NMEA port via        view data across all displays. However, there are some functions
a serial data cable.                                                   and settings that are not 'seen' or shared by all displays on your
                                                                       network. These exceptions are detailed below.

Transferring waypoint and route data                                   Exceptions
                                                                       The following functions and local settings only affect the
1.   Press the DATA button.                                            multifunction display that you are currently using:
2.   Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
3.   Press the TRANSFER ON NMEA softkey.                               · Video -- the picture from any video/camera source will only
                                                                         be shown on the display that the video/camera is physically
4.   Press the appropriate softkey to send or receive NMEA data.         connected to.
 Note: The TRANSFER ON NMEA softkey is only available when             · Page set -- selecting a set, name, and applications for a particular
 compatible NMEA equipment is powered on and connected to                page.
 your multifunction display.
                                                                       · Power On/Off button (including Day/Night settings).
                                                                       · The ACTIVE window function.
                                                                       · The displayed panel in the Data and Engine Data applications.
                                                                       · Radar and Fishfinder presentation settings.
                                                                       · Radar VRMs, EBLs, and Wakes.
                                                                       · Chart presentation settings when the Chart View is set to LOCAL.
                                                                       · Show/hide waypoints, routes, or tracks.
                                                                       · Fishfinder Setup Menu options (excluding Transducer Settings
                                                                         and DSM Settings).
                                                                       · Video, Databar, and Display Setup menus.
                                                                       · Databar on/off and configuration.
                                                                       · Ruler settings.
Managing display data                                                                                                                       37
Designating a Data Master Display
To ensure that the latest system data -- such as databases of
waypoints, routes and tracks -- is available at all multifunction
displays, one of the displays must be designated as the "data
master".
All system data is managed by the data master. The display that has
been designated as the data master should always be powered-on
-- preferably first, before any additional displays. This is because
every time a change is made to the system data, the data master will
copy its databases to all other displays that are currently powered
on. If the data master is not powered-on, or a data master has not
been designated, an alarm will sound, and you will be prompted to
select a master display.

 Note: When changing the designated data master display, or
 adding an additional display, ensure that all your data is archived
 to a CompactFlash card so that you can restore it later in the
 event of a mistake.



Designating the master display
The following task must be performed on the multifunction display
that you want to designate as the data master:
1.   Press the MENU button.
2.   Using the trackpad, select the System Setup menu item.
3.   Using the trackpad, select the System Integration menu item.
4.   Using the trackpad, select the Data Master > ON option.
5.   Press the OK button.




38                                                                     C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 5: Using waypoints

Chapter contents
·    5.1 Waypoints on page 40
·    5.2 How waypoints are shown in different applications on page 41
·    5.3 Waypoint placement on page 42
·    5.4 Displaying the waypoint list on page 42
·    5.5 Waypoint navigation on page 43
·    5.6 Editing a waypoint on page 44
·    5.7 Waypoint groups on page 46
·    5.8 Password protecting your waypoints on page 47




Using waypoints                                                         39
5.1 Waypoints                                                                 to another NMEA compatible instrument. If the system receives an
                                                                              active waypoint over SeaTalk or NMEA, it is displayed but cannot
A waypoint is a position marked on a chart, radar or fishfinder               be edited. If required, you can prevent access to, modification and
window to indicate a site (for fishing, diving etc.) or as a place to         sight of your waypoint and route databases and functions by means
navigate to. By default, all waypoints are indicated on screen by a           of a password.
waypoint symbol (x). This symbol can be changed if required. You
can also select an alternative symbol to be used as the default for
newly created waypoints.


 Default symbol




                                                                    D9440_1



Waypoints are a core feature of your multifunction display. They can
be created in any application and are displayed on the radar, chart
and fishfinder windows. A series of waypoints can be combined
together to form a route. The details of all waypoints, irrespective
of the application they were created in, are stored in a dedicated
waypoint list which will hold up to 3000 waypoints. All waypoints are,
by default, placed in the MY WAYPOINTS group. If required, you
can create new groups and change the default group. If necessary,
waypoints can be archived to a CompactFlash card or transferred


40                                                                                                                  C-Series Widescreen user reference
5.2 How waypoints are shown in different
applications
In the chart and radar applications, a waypoint is represented when
it is both active (displayed in a box) and inactive (no box), as shown
in the following diagram:


                  Wpt 2


                                                                                                            Active waypoint




                                                                                                                                               D11587_1
                          Wpt 1




                                                                           Waypoints in the Fishfinder Application
                                                                           When a waypoint is created it is represented on fishfinder windows,
                          Alternative waypoint symbols                     by a vertical line labelled WPT. This symbology cannot be changed.




                                                                D11586_1
                              Active waypoint (boxed)


Waypoints in the CDI and 3D chart applications
In the CDI application, a waypoint is represented only when it is                                     WPT
active (displayed in a box):

                                                                                                      WPT


                                                                                                      WPT


                                                                                                      WPT




                                                                                                                                           D11588_1
Using waypoints                                                                                                                               41
5.3 Waypoint placement                                                5.4 Displaying the waypoint list
                                                                      1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
Placing a waypoint at the cursor position                             2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
1. Press the WPTS MOB button.
2. Move the cursor to the position on the chart where you want        Sorting the waypoint list
   the waypoint.
3. Press the WAYPOINT AT CURSOR softkey.                              1. Display the waypoint list.
4. Press OK or wait 4 seconds.                                        2. Press the SORT LIST softkey.
                                                                      3. Press the SELECT SORT OPTION softkey.
                                                                      4. Using the trackpad or rotary control, select the criteria by which
Placing a waypoint at your vessel's position                             you want to sort the list (for example, by Name).
                                                                      5. Press the OK button to apply the change.
1.   Press the WPTS MOB button.
2.   Press the WAYPOINT AT VESSEL softkey.
3.   Press OK or wait 4 seconds.
4.   Alternatively, press the WPTS MOB button twice, and then press
     OK.


Placing a waypoint at a known position
1.   Press the WPTS MOB button.
2.   Press the WAYPOINT AT LAT/LON softkey.
3.   Enter the Latitude/Longitude position..
4.   Press OK twice.




42                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
5.5 Waypoint navigation                                                4. Alternatively, position the cursor over the active waypoint, and
                                                                          press the STOP GOTO softkey.

Navigating to a waypoint using the WPTS MOB                             Note: Once navigation is no longer active, the waypoint symbol
                                                                        returns to its normal unboxed state, and the dashed line between
button                                                                  your boat and the waypoint is removed.
1.   Press the WPTS/MOB button.
2.   Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.
3.   Select the required waypoint from the list.
4.   Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.


Navigating to an existing waypoint selected
on screen
In the chart application:
1. Position the cursor over the required waypoint.
2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.
     The chart displays a dashed line from your vessel to the active
     waypoint, and navigation commences.

 Note: When you arrive at your target waypoint, a message
 will appear, and an alarm will sound. To acknowledge the
 message and silence the alarm, wait 10 seconds or press
 ACKNOWLEDGE.



To stop navigating to a waypoint
1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.
3. Press the STOP GOTO softkey.


Using waypoints                                                                                                                              43
5.6 Editing a waypoint                                                 2.   Press the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.
                                                                       3.   Press the EDIT SYMBOL softkey.
Once a waypoint has been placed it can be edited in a variety of       4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the required symbol in the list
ways. You can:
                                                                       5.   Press the OK button.
· Change the waypoint details - name, symbol, group or add a
  comment.
· Move a waypoint.                                                     Moving a waypoint
· Erase a waypoint.                                                    Moving a waypoint using the cursor
· Change the default symbol and group of newly placed waypoints.       In the chart application:
                                                                       1.   Using the trackpad, move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.
Changing waypoint details                                              2.   Press the MOVE WAYPOINT softkey.
                                                                       3.   Using the trackpad, drag the waypoint to the desired location.
In the chart application:
                                                                       4.   Press the relevant PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.
   Alternatively, select a waypoint from the Waypoint List.             Note: To abandon a move waypoint operation, press CANCEL.
2. Press the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.
3. Using the rotary control, highlight the information you want to     Moving a waypoint by entering new coordinates
   change.
                                                                       In the chart application:
4. Press the relevant EDIT... softkey.
5. Using the rotary control and trackpad, edit the details in each     1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.
   field as required.                                                     Alternatively, select a waypoint from the Waypoint List.
6. Press the OK button once to apply the changes for a single field,   2. Press the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.
   and twice to exit the Edit Waypoint dialog.                         3. Using the rotary control, highlight the information you want to
                                                                          change.
 Note: If you make an editing mistake, press CANCEL.
                                                                       4. Press the relevant EDIT softkey.
                                                                       5. Using the rotary control and trackpad, edit the information in the
                                                                          Position, BRG, and RNG fields as appropriate.
Changing a waypoint symbol                                             6. Press the OK button once to apply the changes and twice to
                                                                          exit the Edit Waypoint dialog.
In the chart application:
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.
   Alternatively, select a waypoint from the Waypoint List.

44                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Note: To abandon a move waypoint operation, press CANCEL.              Erasing all waypoints
                                                                        In the chart or radar application:

Erasing waypoints                                                       1. Press the DATA button.
                                                                        2. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
Erasing a Waypoint Using the Cursor                                     3. Press the ERASE FROM DISPLAY softkey.
In the chart or radar application:                                      4. Press the SELECT LIST softkey until the WPT option is selected.
                                                                           The System Waypoint List is displayed.
1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over the waypoint you        5. Press the ERASE ALL WAYPOINTS softkey.
   want to erase.
                                                                        6. Press the YES softkey to confirm.
   The softkeys change to provide waypoint-related functions.
                                                                         Note: If a route is hidden, its waypoints can still be displayed. If
2. Press the ERASE WAYPOINT softkey.
                                                                         you attempt to erase a waypoint from a hidden route, a warning is
3. Press the YES softkey to confirm.                                     displayed.
4. Press the OK button.

 Note: If a route is hidden, its waypoints can still be displayed. If
 you attempt to erase a waypoint from a hidden route, a warning is
 displayed.

Erasing a waypoint using the waypoint list
In the chart or radar application:
1.   Press the WPTS/MOB button.
2.   Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
3.   Using the trackpad, highlight the waypoint you want to erase.
4.   Press the ERASE WAYPOINT softkey
5.   Press the YES softkey to confirm.
6.   Press the OK button.

 Note: If a route is hidden, its waypoints can still be displayed. If
 you attempt to erase a waypoint from a hidden route, a warning is
 displayed.



Using waypoints                                                                                                                             45
5.7 Waypoint groups                                                    Moving waypoints between groups
Provided that you have not changed the default group, all waypoints    1. Display the Waypoint Group List:
are automatically placed in the default "My Waypoints" group              i. Press the WPTS MOB button.
when they are created. In order to make your waypoints easier to          ii. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
manage, you can organize them into groups of your choice. When            iii. Press the WAYPOINT GROUPS softkey.
fishing, for example, you may only wish to see the waypoints that
                                                                       2. Using the trackpad, select the appropriate waypoint group from
indicate good fishing sites. Other waypoints, say, for racing, would
                                                                          the list.
be superfluous at this time.
                                                                       3. Press the MOVE BETWEEN GROUPS softkey.
 Note: A waypoint cannot be placed in multiple groups.                 4. Press the SELECT GROUP A softkey.
                                                                       5. Using the rotary control, select the waypoint group that contains
                                                                          the waypoint you want to move (known as Group A, or the
Displaying the waypoint group list                                        "source").
                                                                       6. Press the OK button.
1. Press the WPTS MOB button.                                          7. Press the trackpad right to select the waypoint group that
2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.                           you want to move the waypoint to (known as Group B, or the
3. Press the WAYPOINT GROUPS softkey.                                     "destination").
The Waypoint Group List is displayed.                                  8. If the Group B list does not contain the waypoint group you want
                                                                          to move your waypoint to, press the SELECT GROUP B softkey,
                                                                          and use the rotary control to select the required group.
Making a new waypoint group                                            9. Press the MOVE WAYPOINT FROM softkey.
                                                                       The waypoint is moved to the new group.
1. Display the Waypoint Group List:
   i. Press the WPTS MOB button.
   ii. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.                    Changing the default waypoint group
   iii. Press the WAYPOINT GROUPS softkey.
                                                                       1. Press the WPTS MOB button.
2. Press the MAKE NEW GROUP softkey.
                                                                       2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
3. Press the EDIT GROUP NAME softkey (or press OK to accept
   the default name).                                                  3. Press the SET DEFAULT SYM & GROUP softkey.
4. Using the rotary control, edit the name for the new waypoint        4. Press the EDIT DEFAULT softkey.
   group.                                                              5. Using the trackpad, select the waypoint group that you want to
5. Press the OK button to save the changes.                               make the default.
                                                                       6. Press the OK button.


46                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Note: To abandon the group default change operation, press             5.8 Password protecting your waypoints
 CANCEL.
                                                                        You can prevent access to, modification, and visibility of your
                                                                        waypoints and routes by applying a password.
Erasing a waypoint group                                                Password Confirmation
1. Display the Waypoint Group list:                                     When Password Protection is enabled and you are attempting to
   i. Press the WPTS MOB button.                                        access a password protected function for the first time during a
                                                                        power-cycle, the system will request confirmation of your password
   ii. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.                     before you can:
   iii. Press the WAYPOINT GROUPS softkey.
2. Using the trackpad, select the waypoint group that you want to       · Access WPTS key functions. This does not affect the operation of
   erase.                                                                 the MOB function.
3. Press theERASE GROUP softkey.                                        · Access ROUTE softkey functions.
4. Press the YES softkey to confirm.                                    · Create a route from a track. All other track functions are
                                                                          unaffected.
Showing and hiding waypoint groups                                      · Archive or transfer any waypoints.
                                                                        · Enter the Waypoint Password Setup menu.
In the chart application:
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                       Note: Once you have provided a password to the system, it must
                                                                         be entered to access the Password Setup sub-menu, regardless
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.                                of the whether Password Protection is set to ON or OFF.
3. Using the SHOW BY softkey, select the SHOW BY GROUP
   option.
                                                                         Note: Raymarine strongly recommends that you backup your
4. A list of available waypoint groups is displayed. Using the rotary    waypoint data BEFORE password protecting your waypoints.
   control, select the waypoint group that you want to show or hide.     This is so that, in the event that you forget your password, you
5. Using the ON CHART softkey, select the SHOW or HIDE option,           can easily restore your waypoints.
   as appropriate.
6. Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each waypoint group you want to show         Disabled Data/Functions
   or hide.
                                                                        When Password Protection is ON and you have not entered a
                                                                        password, you will NOT be able to:
                                                                        · View details of waypoint and route databases.
                                                                        · Edit waypoints or routes.
Using waypoints                                                                                                                             47
· Goto an existing waypoint.                                         Changing the waypoints password
· Follow a route.                                                    1. Press the MENU button.
· View waypoints on screen (even when the SHOW/HIDE status           2. Using the trackpad, select the System Setup menu item, and
  is set to SHOW).                                                      press the trackpad right to select the menu item.
                                                                     3. Using the trackpad, select the Waypoint Password Setup menu
· View waypoint names on screen (even when WAYPOINT NAME
                                                                        item, and press the trackpad right to select the menu item.
  is set to ON).
                                                                     4. Using the trackpad, select the Change Password menu item,
All other options including GOTO CURSOR are unaffected.                 and press the trackpad right to select the menu item.
                                                                     5. Using the trackpad, enter your new waypoints password (1 to 16
                                                                        characters, and case sensitive).
Specifying a password for waypoints                                  6. Press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button.                                            7. Repeat Steps 5 to 6 to confirm the password.
2. Using the trackpad, select the System Setup menu item, and        8. Enter a hint to help you remember the password (optional).
    press the trackpad right to select the menu item.                9. Press the OK button.
3. Using the trackpad, select the Waypoint Password Setup menu
    item, and press the trackpad right to select the menu item.
4. Using the trackpad, select the Enable Password menu item, and     Disabling password protection for waypoints
    press the trackpad down to select the ON option.
                                                                     1. Press the MENU button.
5. Press the OK button.
                                                                     2. Using the trackpad, select the System Setup menu item, and
6. Read the displayed warning, and press the YES softkey to             press the trackpad right to select the menu item.
    accept it, as appropriate.
                                                                     3. Using the trackpad, select the Waypoint Password Setup menu
7. Using the trackpad, enter the password (1 to 16 characters, and      item, and press the trackpad right to select the menu item.
    case sensitive).
                                                                     4. When prompted, enter your existing waypoints password.
8. Press the OK button.
                                                                     5. Press the OK button.
9. Repeat Steps 7 to 8 to confirm the password.
                                                                     6. Using the trackpad, select the Enable Password menu item, and
10. Add a hint to help you remember the password (optional).            press the trackpad up to select the OFF option.
11. Press the OK button.                                             7. Press the OK button.
The password is now set and protection enabled, although access
to the waypoint and route functions remains available until you
restart your multifunction display.




48                                                                                                        C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 6: Using the chart

Chapter contents
·    6.1 Chart application overview on page 50
·    6.2 Ensure safe navigation on page 50
·    6.3 Using the chart safely on page 51
·    6.4 What the chart displays on page 51
·    6.5 Chart cards on page 52
·    6.6 Chart datum on page 52
·    6.7 Chart setup on page 53
·    6.8 Moving around the chart on page 59
·    6.9 Chart presentation on page 60
·    6.10 Locating your vessel on the chart display on page 72
·    6.11 Waypoints on page 73
·    6.12 Routes on page 75
·    6.13 Tracks on page 82
·    6.14 Measuring distances and bearings on page 84




Using the chart                                                  49
6.1 Chart application overview                                           6.2 Ensure safe navigation
With suitable heading and position data from your charts and a GPS       Ensure safe basic navigation at all times.
module, your multifunction display enables you to
                                                                         This product is intended only as an aid to navigation and must
· Find out where you are.                                                never be used in preference to sound navigational judgment. Only
                                                                         official government charts and notices to mariners contain all the
· Interpret your surroundings.                                           current information needed for safe navigation, and the captain is
· Measure the distance and bearing between two points.                   responsible for their prudent use. It is the user's responsibility to
                                                                         use official government charts, notices to mariners, caution and
· Place waypoints at specific locations.                                 proper navigational skill when operating this or any other Raymarine
· Navigate to a specific point.                                          product.

· Build and follow a route.
· Monitor where you are going.
· Distinguish between fixed and moving objects using radar overlay.
· Record where you have been.
· Manage and edit routes and tracks.
· View AIS data.
You can also use your multifunction display to customize your chart
application to your own particular requirements and circumstances.
You can:
· Alter the way the chart is drawn in relation to your boat and the
  direction you are travelling in (chart orientation and motion mode).
· Manage and edit chart data you have entered.
· Control the level of detail displayed on-screen.




50                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
6.3 Using the chart safely                                             6.4 What the chart displays
When using your chartplotter you should always check that a route      The chart display has a number of features to help you navigate.
is safe.                                                               The following diagram illustrates the main features:
Zoom in to check for hazards, such as small shoals, that may                           Chart orientation   Motion mode   Chart view
not be shown on a smaller scale chart. Until you are familiar with
                                                                                                                                      Status
interpreting the chart display, you should take every opportunity to                                                                  bar
                                                                       Chart range
compare the displayed objects with visual targets, such as buoys
and coastal structures. You should practice harbour and coastal
navigation during daylight and in clear weather conditions. The                                                                       Active
simulator mode can also be used to help you gain experience.                                                                          waypoint


                                                                       Current
                                                                       position
                                                                                                                                       AIS
                                                                       Carto-                                                          target
                                                                       graphic
                                                                       object




Using the chart                                                                                                                                  51
6.5 Chart cards                                                       6.6 Chart datum
Chart cards can be used with your multifunction display to provide    In order for your GPS and chart to correlate accurately with your
chart detail for specific geographic areas.                           paper charts, they must be using the same datum.
Your multifunction display is supplied with embedded cartography      The default datum for your display is WGS1984. If this is not
that provides a level of detail suitable for basic navigation in a    suitable, you can change the setting via the Chart Setup menu.
specific geographic area. If you require charts with a higher level   When you adjust the datum of your multifunction display, a
of detail, or for a different geographic area, it is necessary to     Raymarine GPS will automatically correlate. If you have an external
purchase Navionics® chart cards. To check the current availability    third party GPS, you will need to correlate this separately.
of Navionics chart card types and the latest feature sets, visit
www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it. To obtain Navionics cards,
contact your local dealer or visit the Navionics web site.




52                                                                                                           C-Series Widescreen user reference
6.7 Chart setup                                                         Menu item            Description                 Options

The set up for your chart and its cartography can be changed from       Object Information   Determines how further      · OFF
the standard configuration to suit your particular needs.                                    information is accessed
                                                                                             for cartographic areas      · Points ON
Although you will probably only do this when you first use the chart,                        and objects:                · All ON (default)
you may decide to make subsequent adjustments once you become
more familiar with the system. Any settings that you change are                              · OFF -- Information
retained even when you power off.                                                              is displayed for a
                                                                                               cartographic object
                                                                                               when you move the
Selecting the chart setup menu                                                                 cursor over the object
                                                                                               and press the OK
In the chart application:                                                                      button.
1. Press the MENU button.                                                                    · ALL ON --
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Chart Setup menu item.                                    Information is
                                                                                               displayed for
3. Press right on the trackpad to enter the Chart Setup menu.                                  cartographic objects
                                                                                               and areas when you
                                                                                               move the cursor over
Chart setup menu options                                                                       an object or area.
The following table describes the various options in the Chart Setup                         · Points ON --
Menu for your multifunction display.                                                           Information is
                                                                                               displayed for a
                                                                                               cartographic object
                                                                                               when you move the
                                                                                               cursor over the object.




Using the chart                                                                                                                               53
 Menu item       Description                 Options                Menu item             Description              Options
 Vector Length   The distance that your      · 3 mins               Record Vessel Track   Determines how track     · Auto (default)
                 vessel travels in the                              By                    points are recorded on
                 time period specified for   · 6 mins                                     the chart:               · Time
                 this option, determines     · Infinite (default)                                                  · Distance
                 the length of the vector                                                 · Auto -- track points
                 lines drawn on the                                                         are automatically
                 chart display. This                                                        created.
                 affects COG and HDG                                                      · Time -- track points
                 (heading) vectors. If                                                      are created based on
                 theInfinite option is                                                      time.
                 selected, the vector will
                 extend to the edge of                                                    · Distance -- track
                 the chart window.                                                          points are created
                                                                                            based on distance.
 Vector Width    Sets the width of           · Thin
                 the COG and HDG
                 (heading) chart vector      · Normal (default)
                 lines.                      · Wide
 Route Width     Sets the width of routes.   · Thin
                                             · Normal (default)
                                             · Wide




54                                                                                                         C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu item        Description                Options                   Menu item   Description                 Options
 Track Interval   Determines the interval    If TIME is selected for   Datum       In order for your GPS       · WGS1984 (default)
                  that will be used for      the Record Vessel                     and chart to correlate
                  track point creation.      Track By menu item:                   accurately with your        · List of available
                  The options available                                            paper charts, they must       datum
                  depend on the option       · 2 secs                              be using the same
                  selected for the Record    · 5 secs                              datum. The default
                  Vessel Track By menu                                             datum for your display
                  item, as follows:          · 10 secs                             is WGS1984. If this is
                                                                                   not suitable, you can
                  · Auto -- If the Auto      · 30 secs
                                                                                   change the setting.
                    option is selected for   · 1 min                               When you change the
                    the Record Vessel                                              datum setting, the chart
                    Track By menu            · 3 min                               grid will subsequently
                    item, no options                                               move according to
                    are available for the    · 5 min
                                                                                   the new datum, and
                    Track Interval menu      · 10 min                              the latitude/longitude
                    item.                                                          of the cartographic
                                             · 30 min                              features will also change
                  · Time -- If the Time
                    option is selected for   If DISTANCE is selected               accordingly. The system
                    the Record Vessel        for the Record Vessel                 attempts to set up any
                    Track By menu item,      Track By menu item:                   GPS to the new mode,
                    you can use theTrack                                           and indicates whether
                    Interval menu item       · 0.02 nm                             this was successful or
                    to specify the time                                            not.
                                             · 0.05 nm
                    interval.
                                             · 0.1 nm
                  · Distance -- If the
                    Distance option is       · 0.2 nm
                    selected for the         · 0.5 nm
                    Record Vessel Track
                    By menu item, you        · 1.0 nm
                    can use theTrack
                    Interval menu item to
                    specify the distance
                    interval.

Using the chart                                                                                                                      55
 Menu item                  Description                 Options           Menu item          Description                 Options
 Chart Offset               Allows you to move          · ON              Chart Display      Determines the level        · Simple
                            the position of the                                              of detail shown on the
                            chart in order to correct   · OFF (default)                      chart.                      · Detailed (default)
                            for position errors in                                                                       · Extra Detailed
                            the cartography. This
                            adjustment is indicated                       Chart Grid         Determines whether          · OFF
                            in the chart application                                         grid lines representing
                                                                                             longitude and latitude      · ON (default)
                            as a distance north/west
                            (+ve) or south/east                                              are displayed on the
                            (-ve) from your vessel                                           chart:
                            position, to a maximum
                            of 1000m. When you                                               · OFF -- grid lines are
                            press the trackpad right                                           NOT displayed.
                            to select this menu item,                                        · ON -- grid lines are
                            the OFFSET softkey is                                              displayed.
                            displayed, enabling you
                            to switch chart offset ON                     Chart Text         Determines whether          · OFF
                            or OFF.                                                          chart text is displayed
                                                                                             (place names and so         · ON (default)
                                                                                             on).
                                                                                             · OFF -- chart text is
                                                                                               NOT displayed.
Selecting the cartography setup menu
                                                                                             · ON -- chart text is
In the chart application:                                                                      displayed.
1. Press the MENU button.                                                 Chart Boundaries   Determines whether a        · OFF
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Cartography Setup menu item.                            line indicating the chart
                                                                                             boundary is displayed.      · ON (default)
3. Press right on the trackpad to enter the Cartography Setup menu.
                                                                                             · OFF -- chart
                                                                                               boundary is NOT
Cartography setup menu options                                                                 displayed.

The following table describes the various options in the Cartography                         · ON -- chart boundary
Setup Menu for your multifunction display.                                                     is displayed.

56                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu item        Description                 Options             Menu item    Description                Options
 Spot Soundings   Determines whether a        · OFF               Hide Rocks   Determines whether         · OFF (default)
                  number indicating depth                                      rocks are shown or
                  is displayed.               · ON (default)                   hidden on the chart, and   · 16 ft
                                                                               the depth at which they    · 20 ft
                  · OFF -- depth is NOT                                        are shown:
                    displayed.                                                                            · 33 ft
                                                                               · OFF -- rocks are
                  · ON -- depth is                                               displayed.               · 66 ft
                    displayed.
                                                                               · 16 ft -- rocks are
 Safety Contour   Areas with depths that      · OFF                              hidden at depths of
                  are SHALLOWER than                                             16ft and greater.
                  this specified value are    · 7 ft
                  shaded in a blue color      · 10 ft                          · 20 ft -- rocks are
                  that is darker than areas                                      hidden at depths of
                  with depths that are        · 16 ft                            20ft and greater.
                  GREATER than this           · 20 ft
                  specified value.                                             · 33 ft -- rocks are
                                                                                 hidden at depths of
                                              · 33 ft
                                                                                 33ft and greater.
                                              · 66 ft (default)
                                                                               · 66 ft -- rocks are
 Depth Contour    The depth contour is        · OFF                              hidden at depths of
                  shown on the chart                                             66ft and greater.
                  display as a line           · 16 ft
                                                                  Nav. Marks   Determines whether         · OFF
                  indicating the depth        · 20 ft                          navigation marks are
                  at a particular position.                                                               · ON (default)
                                              · 33 ft                          displayed on the chart:

                                              · 66 ft                          · OFF -- navigation
                                                                                 marks are NOT
                                              · ALL (default)                    displayed.
                                                                               · ON -- navigation
                                                                                 marks are displayed.




Using the chart                                                                                                             57
 Menu item            Description                 Options                     Menu item              Description                Options
 Nav. Marks Symbols   Determines which set of     · International (default)   Marine Features        When this menu item        · OFF
                      navigation mark symbols                                                        is set to ON, the
                      is used -- International,   · US                                               following water-based      · ON (default)
                      or US. These symbols                                                           cartographic features
                      correspond to paper                                                            are displayed:
                      charts.
                                                                                                     · Cables.
 Light Sectors        Determines whether          · OFF
                      the sector of light cast                                                       · Nature of seabed
                      by a fixed beacon is        · ON (default)                                       points.
                      displayed or not.                                                              · Tide stations.
                      · OFF -- sector of light                                                       · Current stations.
                        is NOT displayed.
                                                                                                     · Port information.
                      · ON -- sector of light
                        is displayed.                                         Land Features          When this menu item is     · OFF
                                                                                                     set to ON, land-based
 Caution & Routing    Determines whether          · OFF                                              cartographic features      · ON (default)
 Data                 caution and routing data                                                       are displayed.
                      is displayed or not.        · ON (default)
                                                                              Colored Seabed Areas   When this menu item is     · OFF (default)
                      · OFF -- caution and                                                           set to ON, the seabed
                        routing data is NOT                                                          is shown in greater        · ON
                        displayed.                                                                   definition in certain
                                                                                                     areas where the extra
                      · ON -- caution
                                                                                                     detail is available.
                        and routing data
                        is displayed.                                         Background Color       Determines what color      · White (default)
                                                                                                     the background water
                                                                                                     will be in any areas       · Blue
                                                                                                     where Navionics
                                                                                                     cartography is not
                                                                                                     available.




58                                                                                                                      C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu item              Description                  Options               6.8 Moving around the chart
 Business Services      When this menu item          · OFF                 You can move around the chart using the pan and zoom controls.
                        is set to ON, symbols
                        indicating the location      · ON (default)        A combination of zooming and panning is required to move around
                        of a business will be                              the chart and display an area at the appropriate scale.
                        shown.
                                                                            Note: When you pan the chart, or when you change the scale in
 Aerial Photo Overlay   Determines the area          · On Land and Sea      autorange mode; the motion mode is suspended.
                        that will be displayed for
                        aerial photo overlay.        · On Land (default)
                                                                                          Panning moves the displayed chart to a different area. When
 Roads                  Determines whether           · OFF                                the cursor reaches the edge of the screen, the chart pans.
                        major coastal roads are
                        displayed on the chart:      · ON (default)

                        · OFF -- coastal roads
                          are NOT displayed.                                              When you zoom in, the chart scale changes to show a smaller
                                                                                          area in more detail. Conversely, if you zoom out the chart area
                        · ON -- coastal roads
                                                                                          displayed is increased but the detail is reduced.
                          are displayed.
 Additional Wrecks      Determines whether           · OFF
                        extended information for
                        new wrecks is displayed:     · ON (default)         Note: The cartographic detail available on charts varies
                                                                            according to the chart and the chart scale. Some areas provide
                        · OFF -- extended                                   detail at smaller scales than others.
                          wreck information is
                          NOT displayed.                                   A feature of the chart is `autoscale'. If you select a chart scale that
                                                                           does not have cartographic detail in some areas, the chart will use
                        · ON -- extended                                   the most detailed level available for the surrounding area and stretch
                          wreck information is                             it to fit the selected scale. This means that you will never have blank
                          displayed.                                       or hatched areas on your screen. However there may be some
                                                                           mis-alignment of objects which cross the chart boundary in this area.


                                                                           Zooming in and out
                                                                           1. To zoom in closer to the picture, press the RANGE IN control.

Using the chart                                                                                                                                         59
2. To zoom out further from the picture, press the RANGE OUT           6.9 Chart presentation
   control.
3. Press and hold the button to zoom continuously.                     The chart can be viewed in a number of ways to suit your needs.
                                                                       You will normally view your chart with the vessel on screen and
                                                                       motion mode `active'. When motion mode is active, as your vessel
Panning around the display                                             moves, the chart is redrawn to keep the vessel on screen. When
                                                                       you zoom the chart in active mode, the chart zooms about your
1. To pan around the display, press the trackpad in the direction in   vessel position. Alternatively, you may be planning a journey and
   which you want to pan.                                              do not want the chart to redraw as your vessel moves. You can
2. Press and hold the trackpad in the relevant direction to pan        suspend the active motion mode by using the cursor to pan the chart
   continuously.                                                       or by selecting FIND CURSOR. When motion mode is suspended,
                                                                       the mode is shown in the status bar in parenthesis e.g. (RELATIVE
                                                                       MOTION); zoom operates about your cursor position. Provided the
Navigating to the cursor position on the chart                         necessary data to ascertain your vessel's position is available, you
                                                                       can activate the motion mode, by selecting FIND SHIP.
1. Position the cursor at the desired destination on the chart.
2. Press the GOTO softkey.
3. Press the GOTO CURSOR softkey.                                      Changing the chart display
 Note: This target waypoint is also identified on the radar.           Each chart window can be tailored to meet your particular needs.
                                                                       You can:
                                                                       · Set the chart view for individual windows or system wide.
                                                                       · Change how the chart is orientated.
                                                                       · Change the way your chart is drawn in relation to your boat
                                                                         movement.

                                                                       Working with multiple chart views
                                                                       If you have more than one chart window, you can either share the
                                                                       presentation or present each window independently. The option
                                                                       you have chosen is indicated on the chart status bar as LOCAL or
                                                                       SYSTEM.




60                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
 SYSTEM           When a chart application is started, it defaults to SYSTEM     It is used in conjunction with motion mode to control how your boat
 chart view       view. Any windows set to SYSTEM view will have the same        and chart relate to one another and how they are displayed on
                  presentation as other system windows for:                      screen. The mode that you choose is restored at power up. Any
                                                                                 changes that you make to a chart window that is set to system
                  · Chart mode and orientation.                                  view will be reflected in all other system view chart windows. The
                                                                                 following options are available:
                  · Chart layers -- radar and AIS.
                  · Radar/chart synchronization.                                 North Up (N-up)
                  · Show/hide waypoints, routes and tracks.                      In North Up mode, the chart orientation is fixed with true north
                                                                                 upwards. As your heading changes the boat symbol moves
                  · Declutter.                                                   accordingly. This is the default mode for the chart application.
                  · Vectors.                                                     Head Up (H-up)
                  If you change any of these options in one window, all system   Head Up mode displays the chart with your boat's current heading
                  windows will be updated.                                       upwards. As the heading changes the boat symbol remains fixed
 LOCAL            When LOCAL chart view is selected, the presentation for each   and the chart picture rotates accordingly.
 chart view       window is set independently.                                    Note: To prevent continuous backwards and forwards rotations
                                                                                  as the boat yaws from side-to-side, the chart will not update
Selecting local or system chart view                                              unless the heading changes by at least 10 degrees from the last
                                                                                  displayed orientation.
In the chart application:
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                                Note: It is not possible to select Head Up when the motion mode
2. Press the CHART VIEW softkey to toggle between LOCAL and                       is set to True.
   SYSTEM chart views.
                                                                                 Course Up (C-up)
 Note: The motion mode will be set but not synchronized across
 windows when the chart view is set to SYSTEM.                                   In Course Up mode, the chart picture is stabilized and shown with
                                                                                 your current course upwards. As your boat's heading changes, the
                                                                                 ship symbol moves accordingly. If you select a new course, the
                                                                                 picture will reset to display the new course upwards. The reference
Chart orientation                                                                used for Course-Up depends upon the information available at a
                                                                                 given time. The system always prioritizes this information in the
The orientation of a chart refers to the relationship between the                following order:
chart and the direction that you are travelling in.
                                                                                 1. Bearing from origin to destination, i.e. intended course.


Using the chart                                                                                                                                     61
2. Locked heading from an Autopilot.                                   · True Motion
3. Bearing to waypoint.                                                · Autorange
4. Instantaneous heading.                                              When you pan the chart or toggle Find Ship/Cursor to Cursor, the
                                                                       motion mode is suspended. This is indicated in the status bar by `(
If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode, a warning
                                                                       )' around the motion mode and enables you to view another area
message will be shown and the chart uses 0° heading in relative
                                                                       of the chart whilst navigating. To reset the motion mode and return
motion.
                                                                       your vessel to the screen, press Find Ship. Manually changing
Setting the chart orientation                                          the range in autorange also suspends motion mode. The default
                                                                       setting is relative motion with zero offset. The mode that you select
In the chart application:                                              is restored at power up. When a chart window is set to System
                                                                       view, the motion mode will be set but not synchronized across other
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                     system view windows.
2. Press the CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
3. Press the ORIENTATION softkey until the required option (H-UP,      Relative Motion (RM) with optional vessel offset
   N-UP, or C-UP) is selected.                                         When the motion mode is set to Relative, the position of your vessel
4. Press the OK button.                                                is fixed on the screen and the chart picture moves relative to your
                                                                       vessel. You can specify using the Vessel Offset softkey, whether
Maintaining a view of your navigation                                  the vessel is fixed in the centre of the window (0 offset) or offset by
                                                                       1/3 or 2/3. If you change the offset to 1/3 or 2/3, the view ahead
In the chart application:                                              of your vessel will be increased.
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
                                                                                                                           2/3 Vessel offset
3. Press the MOTION MODE softkey, and select the AR option.
The chart will automatically maintain a view of both your vessel and                                                       1/3 Vessel offset
the target waypoint on screen.
                                                                                                                            0Vessel offset


Setting the motion mode
The motion mode controls the relationship between the chart and
your vessel.
Whilst motion mode is active, as your vessel moves, the chart is




                                                                                                                                               D6839_3
redrawn to keep the vessel on-screen. The three motion modes are:
· Relative Motion

62                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
In the following example the motion mode has been set to Relative,          cartography by moving the position of the chart.
with a vessel offset of 1/3. The vessel is fixed in the offset position     This adjustment is indicated as a distance north/west (+ve) or
and the chart moves accordingly:                                            south/east (-ve) from your vessel position, to a maximum of 1000m.
                                                                            To view the effects of an offset you can turn the feature on or off.
                                                                            Once calculated, the offset is applied to all charts.

                                                                             Note: Any offset entered will be applied to all charts on the chart
                                                                             card. You should therefore ensure that this feature is switched




                                                                  D6840_2
                                                                             off once you have compensated for the position errors in the
                                                                             cartography. Any charting errors that you discover should be
True Motion (TM)                                                             reported to Navionics.
When the motion mode is set to True, the chart is fixed and the
vessel moves in true perspective to fixed landmasses on the screen.         Enabling chart offset
As the vessel's position approaches the edge of the screen, the
chart picture is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of the        1. Press the MENU button.
vessel.                                                                     2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Chart Setup menu option, and
                                                                               press the trackpad right to select it.
 Note: It is not possible to select True Motion when the orientation        3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Chart Offset menu option, and
 is set to Head Up.                                                            press the trackpad right to select it.
                                                                            4. Press the OFFSET softkey, and select the ON option.

                                                                             Note: If your vessel position is not available, the current chart
                                                                             center is used as the reference point.


                                                                  D6841-2
                                                                            Changing the chart offset value

Autorange                                                                   1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                            2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Chart Setup menu item. Press
Autorange selects and maintains the largest possible scale of chart            the trackpad right to select the menu item.
that will display both the vessel and the target waypoint. Autorange
                                                                            3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Chart Offset menu item. Press
is not available if radar-chart synchronization is on.
                                                                               the trackpad right to select the menu item.
                                                                            4. Press the OFFSET softkey to switch Chart Offset ON.
Chart offset                                                                5. Press the ADJUST N-S or ADJUST E-W softkey as appropriate,
                                                                               and use the rotary control to change the value.
Chart offset enables you to compensate for position errors in the

Using the chart                                                                                                                                    63
6. Press the OK button.                                                    Enabling aerial photo overlay

Resetting the chart offset value                                           In the chart application:

1. Press the MENU button.                                                  1. Press the PRESENTATION softtkey.
2. Highlight the Chart Setup menu option, and press the right              2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
   cursor key to select it.                                                3. Press the AERIAL OVERLAY softkey repeatedly until the ON
3. Highlight the Chart Offset option, and press the right cursor              option is selected.
   key to select it.                                                       4. Press the OK button.
4. Press the OFFSET softkey to select the ON option.
                                                                           Specifying aerial overlay opacity
5. Press the SET OFFSET softkey.
6. Press the CLEAR OFFSET softkey.                                         In the chart application:
                                                                           1. Press the PRESENTATION softtkey.
Chart layers                                                               2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
                                                                           3. Press the AERIAL OVERLAY softkey repeatedly until the ON
                                                                              option is selected.
Aerial photo overlay                                                          The opacity gauge is displayed above the softkey.
You can overlay an aerial photo on to the chart display, helping you       4. Using the rotary control, select the level of opacity required,
to interpret your environment and its features.                               between 1 and 100%.
If you are using a suitable chart card, you can overlay an aerial          5. Press the OK button.
photo on to the chart display. This covers the navigable waters up to
                                                                           Specifying the aerial overlay area
three miles inside the coastline.
Beyond these limits, the land will appear green, and the resolution is     In the chart application, with aerial photo overlay enabled:
dependent on the region covered by the chart card you are using.           1.   Press the MENU button.
Using the options in the Cartography Setup Menu, you can specify           2.   Using the trackpad, select the Cartography Setup menu item.
whether the aerial photo overlay is displayed for land areas only, or      3.   Using the trackpad, select the Aerial Photo Overlay menu item.
for land and sea areas.
                                                                           4.   Press the trackpad right to select the On Land or On Land and
You can also adjust the opacity of the aerial photo overlay if required.        Sea option, as appropriate.
 Note: When the CHART VIEW mode is set to SYSTEM, the
 aerial photo overlay is displayed in ALL networked displays.



64                                                                                                                 C-Series Widescreen user reference
5. Press the OK button.                                                  Using radar overlay to distinguish between fixed and moving
                                                                         objects
                                                                         You can overlay radar image data over your chart image allowing
Radar overlay                                                            better distinction between fixed objects and other marine traffic. For
                                                                         best results, switch on Radar-Chart synchronization to ensure radar
You can combine the chart with the radar or MARPA functions to           range and chart scale are synchronized.
provide target tracking or to help you distinguish between fixed
objects and other marine traffic.                                        Enabling and disabling radar overlay
You can enhance the use of your chart by combining it with the
following radar features:                                                In the chart application:

· Radar range synchronization.                                           1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                         2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
· MARPA.                                                                 3. Press the RADAR OVERLAY softkey until the ON or OFF option
· Radar overlay (for distinguishing between fixed and moving                is selected, as required.
  objects).
                                                                          Note: If radar overlay is applied to a chart window that is set
Radar range synchronization                                               to system view, the overlay will be displayed in all other system
                                                                          view chart windows.
When synchronization is switched on:
· The radar range in all radar windows, changes to match the chart       Changing the radar range from the chart display
  scale.
                                                                         In the chart application:
· `Sync' is indicated in the top left-hand corner of the chart window.
                                                                         1.   Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
· If you change the radar range, in any radar window, all                2.   Press the CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
  synchronized chart views change scale to match.
                                                                         3.   Press the CHART SYNC softkey until the RDR option is selected.
· If you change the scale of a synchronized chart window, all radar      4.   Press the OK button.
  windows change range to match.                                         5.   Use the RANGE IN or OUT control to change the radar range.
Using the radar to view MARPA targets on the chart                       Synchronizing the chart with the radar range
The Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA) function is used
for target tracking and risk analysis. When MARPA is set up in           In the chart application:
radar mode or radar overlay, all MARPA targets are displayed in the      1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
chart window and associated MARPA functions can be accessed
                                                                         2. Press the CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
via the chart.
                                                                         3. Press the CHART SYNC softkey until the RDR option is selected.

Using the chart                                                                                                                               65
 Note: Radar range synchronization is not available when the             2. Alternatively, with Radar Overlay switched on, press the
 chart motion mode is set to AUTORANGE.                                     TARGET TRACKING softkey.

Chart scale and radar range synchronization
                                                                         Bathymetric data
You can synchronize the radar range in all radar windows with the
chart scale.                                                             You can view detailed bathymetric contour data in the chart
When synchronization is switched on:                                     application for use during fishing.
                                                                         Before you can display bathymetric data in the chart application, you
· The radar range in all radar windows changes to match the chart        must have Navionics chart cards with the relevant level of detail.
  scale.
                                                                         When you change the CHART TYPE to the FISH option, bathymetric
· `Sync' is indicated in the top left-hand corner of the chart window.   data is shown on the chart (where available, based on your chart
· If you change the radar range, in any radar window, all                card).
  synchronized chart views change scale to match.
                                                                         Enabling bathymetric data
· If you change the scale of a synchronized chart window, all radar
  windows change range to match.                                         In the chart application:
                                                                         1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
Synchronizing radar range with chart scale
                                                                         2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
In the chart application:                                                3. Press the CHART TYPE softkey repeatedly until the FISH option
                                                                            is selected.
1.   Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                         4. Press the OK button.
2.   Press the CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
3.   Press the CHART SYNC softkey until the RDR option is selected.
4.   Press the OK button.                                                AIS objects
 Note: Radar range synchronization is not available when the             You can view AIS objects in the chart display to help you avoid
 chart motion mode is set to AUTORANGE.                                  collisions, and identify vessels.
                                                                         If you have a suitable AIS receiver or transceiver connected to your
Accessing MARPA controls on the chart                                    multifunction display, you can use the AIS layer to:
In the chart application:                                                · Display targets for any other AIS-equipped vessels.
1. Select the target using the cursor.                                   · Display voyage information being broadcasted by these targets
                                                                           -- for example, their position, course, speed and rate of turn.
     The MARPA-related softkeys are displayed.

66                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
· Display basic or detailed information for each target vessel            The Chart Layers menu is displayed.
  including safety-critical target data.                               4. Using the trackpad, select the AIS Objects menu item.
· Set up a safe zone around your boat.                                 5. Press the trackpad right to select the ON option.
                                                                       6. Press the OK button.
· View AIS alarm and safety related messages.

Enabling AIS objects
                                                                       3D chart view locator
In the chart application:
                                                                       You can show a 3D view locator on the 2D chart to indicate the
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                     boundaries of the area currently shown on the 3D chart.
2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.                                     The 3D view locator is a polygon outlined in blue that can be
3. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.                                     overlayed on the 2D chart. As you rotate and pitch the vessel
                                                                       symbol on the display, or use the pan and zoom controls, the blue
   The Chart Layers menu is displayed.
                                                                       polygon moves on the 2D chart to indicate the boundaries of the
4. Using the trackpad, select the AIS Objects menu item.               area currently shown on the 3D chart.
5. Press the trackpad right to select the ON option.
6. Press the OK button.                                                Enabling the 3D locator
                                                                       In the chart application:
Range rings                                                            1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                       2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
Displaying range rings on the chart enables you to measure
                                                                       3. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
distances.
Range rings give you an incremental representation of distance            The Chart Layers menu is displayed.
from your vessel to help you judge distances at a glance. The rings    4. Using the trackpad, select the 3D Locator menu item.
are always centred on your vessel, and the scale varies to suit your   5. Press the trackpad right to select the ON option.
current zoom setting. Each ring is labelled with the distance from     6. Press the OK button.
your vessel.

Enabling range rings
                                                                       Chart vectors
In the chart application:
                                                                       Chart vectors show additional information on the chart display,
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                     including heading and COG vectors, and wind and tide arrows.
2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
3. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.

Using the chart                                                                                                                          67
A range of vector graphics can be superimposed on to the chart         If there are a large number of cartographic objects in a particular
display. The following vectors can be independently enabled or         area, you can turn on the declutter option to hide the following
disabled:                                                              cartographic objects:
· HDG (heading) vector -- shows the vessel's heading, displayed        · Text.
  as a line with an open arrow head. It does not take winds or tides
  into account.                                                        · Chart boundaries.

· COG (Course Over Ground) vector -- indicates the vessel's actual     · Spot soundings.
  course, and is displayed as a line with two open arrow heads.        · Depth contours.
· Wind and tide vectors -- winds and tides are displayed as lines      · Light sectors.
  with solid arrow heads in the direction of the wind or tidal set.
  Wind arrows point towards your vessel, and tidal arrows point        · Caution and routing Data.
  away. The width of the arrow indicates its strength.
                                                                       · Land and marine features.
 Note: The length of the HDG and COG vector lines is determined        · Business services (if available for your cartography).
 by the distance your vessel will travel in the time you have
 specified (3 mins, 6 mins or Infinite) in the Chart Setup Menu at     Decluttering the chart display
 the current speed. Any times that you specify will apply to all
 chart views, and if theInfinite option is selected, the vector will   In the chart application:
 extend to the edge of the chart window.
                                                                       1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                       2. Press the DECLUTTER softkey and select the ON option.
 Note: If neither Speed Over Ground (SOG) or heading data is
 available, vectors cannot be displayed.
                                                                       Displaying details of tides and currents
Enabling and disabling chart vectors
                                                                       Displaying details of tides
1. Press the DATA button.
2. Press the CHART VECTORS softkey.                                    In the chart application:
3. Press the appropriate softkey to enable or disable the chart        1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over the diamond-shaped
   vectors you want to use.                                               tidal symbol.
                                                                       2. Press the OK button to display information for that tide.
Decluttering the chart                                                 3. To display additional tidal data, press the TIDAL DATA softkey.
                                                                       4. To move the time selector, use the trackpad.
You can reduce the amount of detail shown on the chart by
de-cluttering the chart display.

68                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
5. To change the displayed date, use the appropriate softkeys.

Displaying details of currents
In the chart application:
1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over the diamond-shaped
   current symbol.
2. Press the OK button to display information for that current.
3. To display additional current data, press the CURRENT DATA
   softkey.
4. To move the time selector, use the trackpad.
5. To change the displayed date, use the appropriate softkeys.


Animated tide and current information
You can set the date for the animation and choose to see the
whole animation from the beginning or start it at any point within    Symbol                           Description
the 24-hour period.
                                                                                                       Direction and speed of current (green
You can also choose to view the animation continuously or to step                                      arrows).
through it in increments of time that you set.


                                                                                                       Tide height.




                                                                     Viewing animated tide and current information
                                                                     In the chart application:
                                                                     1. Using the cursor, highlight a tide or current icon.
                                                                     2. Press OK to open the Object Info dialog box and toolbar.

Using the chart                                                                                                                            69
3. Press the Animate softkey.                                          Additional chart information
     The Tide/Current Animation screen opens with the animation        You can display additional information on the chart for cartographic
     paused.                                                           objects, ports, and marinas.
Controlling tide and current animations                                Depending on the chart card you are using, you will also be able to
                                                                       view some or all of the following additional information:
In the chart application, with a tide animation displayed:
                                                                       · Details of each cartographic object that is marked on the chart,
1. To start or stop the animation, press the ANIMATION                   including source data for structures, lines, open sea areas, and
   PLAY/PAUSE softkey.                                                   so on.
2. To view the animation in steps, use the STEP BACK or STEP           · Details of ports, port features, and business services.
   FWD softkeys.
                                                                       · Pilot book information (similar to what you would see in a marine
3. To set the animation step interval, pause any playing animations,
                                                                         almanac). Pilot book information is available at certain ports.
   and press the SET TIME INTERVAL softkey.
4. To set the animation date, press the SET DATE softkey. The Edit     · Panoramic photos of ports and marinas. The availability of photos
   Date screen shows the following options:                              is indicated by a camera symbol on the chart display.

 TODAY'S           Set the animation date to the current date.          Note: For full details of the features available with each chart
 DATE                                                                   card type, refer to the Navionics website: www.navionics.com or
                                                                        www.navionics.it.
 PREV DATE         Set the animation date to 24-hours previous to
                   current date.                                       Using the port search option
 NEXT DATE         Set the animation date to 24-hours ahead of         In the chart application:
                   current date.
                                                                       1. Press the OK button.
 EDIT DATE         Opens the Edit Date pop-up screen: use the
                   trackpad or rotary control to enter the date you    2. Press the SEARCH BY NAME softkey.
                   want to see an animation for.                       3. Press the EDIT NAME softkey.
                                                                       4. Enter the name of the port, and press theOK button.
5. Press OK to save the new date and return to the Tide/Current        5. Press theSEARCH softkey.
   Animation screen, or CANCEL to ignore the date change and
   return to the Tide/Current Animation screen, leaving the date       6. If the search returns more than one port, highlight the required
   setting unchanged.                                                     port, and press right on the trackpad to select it.
                                                                       7. Use the trackpad to select a service associated with that port.

                                                                       Using the cursor to find a port
                                                                       In the chart application:

70                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
1.   Select the appropriate port symbol in the chart view.             Business services/points of inter             est symbols
2.   Press the OK button.
3.   A list of services associated with the port is displayed.
4.   Press theVIEW DETAILS softkey.
                                                                       Anchorage     Airport     Babysitting    Barber       Bank      Camping      Car hire   Firemen
5.   Use the trackpad to select a service.
6.   Press the SHOW ON CHART softkey to center the screen on
     the selected port, if required.

Displaying details of services and points of interest                    Fishing   Gas/Petrol     Parking        Golf        Gym        Hospital     Hotel     Laundry
                                                                       equipment
In the chart application:
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the service or point
   of interest symbol.
2. Press the OK button. Additional information is displayed.            Nautical     Marina       Museum        Police     Post Office Restaurant     Ship      Shop
                                                                        repairs                                                                      repairs
Business services and points of interest symbols
The location of various business services and points of interest is
indicated by the following symbols:
                                                                          Taxi        Tourist      Train         Water     Weather
                                                                        station    information                 transport   station




                                                                                                                                                                         D8226_1
                                                                      Displaying details of objects and features
                                                                      In the chart application:
                                                                      1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the object. The basic
                                                                         object information will be displayed.
                                                                      2. Press the OK button. Detailed information for that object is
                                                                         displayed.




Using the chart                                                                                                                                                          71
3. If the object you have selected has more than one subject           6.10 Locating your vessel on the chart
   area, use the rotary control to highlight and select the required
   information.                                                        display
Displaying pilot book information                                      Your current position is represented on screen by a boat symbol.
                                                                       The boat symbol is shown below:
In the chart application, when a port symbol is displayed:
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the port symbol.
                                                                            D6627-1
2. Press the OK button.
                                                                        Boat symbol
   The Object Info dialog is displayed.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Pilot Book menu item, and         If neither heading nor Course Over Ground (COG) data is available,
   press the trackpad right to select it.                              the vessel is shown as a solid circle. If positional data has been
                                                                       selected for display, your position will be displayed in the data bar
4. Using the trackpad, highlight the relevant book or chapter.
                                                                       under VES POS.
5. Press the VIEW PILOT BOOK softkey.

Displaying panoramic photos
                                                                       How to locate your vessel
In the chart application, when a camera symbol is displayed,
indicating the availability of a photo:                                In the chart application:

1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the camera symbol.         1. Press the FIND softkey and select the SHIP option.
2. Press the OK button.                                                   Your vessel is displayed in the center of the chart.
3. Press the VIEW PHOTO softkey.                                       2. To mark this position, press the WPTS MOB button twice, then
                                                                          press the OK button.




72                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
6.11 Waypoints                                                        To stop navigating to a waypoint
                                                                      1.   Press the WPTS/MOB button.
Waypoint navigation                                                   2.   Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                      3.   Press the STOP GOTO softkey.
Navigating to a waypoint using the cursor                             4.   Alternatively, position the cursor over the active waypoint, and
                                                                           press the STOP GOTO softkey.
In the chart application:
1. Position the cursor over the waypoint you want to navigate to.      Note: Once navigation is no longer active, the waypoint symbol
                                                                       returns to its normal unboxed state, and the dashed line between
2. Press the GO TO WAYPOINT softkey.
                                                                       your boat and the waypoint is removed.
Navigating to a waypoint using the GOTO option
In the chart application:
                                                                      Waypoint editing
1. Press the GOTO softkey.
                                                                      Moving a waypoint by entering new coordinates
2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS or GOTO CURSOR
   softkey, as appropriate.                                           In the chart application:
3. Select the required waypoint from the list.
4. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.                                   1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.
                                                                         Alternatively, select a waypoint from the Waypoint List.
Navigating to an existing waypoint selected on screen                 2. Press the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.
                                                                      3. Using the rotary control, highlight the information you want to
In the chart application:                                                change.
1. Position the cursor over the required waypoint.                    4. Press the relevant EDIT softkey.
2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.                                   5. Using the rotary control and trackpad, edit the information in the
                                                                         Position, BRG, and RNG fields as appropriate.
    The chart displays a dashed line from your vessel to the active   6. Press the OK button once to apply the changes and twice to
    waypoint, and navigation commences.                                  exit the Edit Waypoint dialog.
 Note: When you arrive at your target waypoint, a message              Note: To abandon a move waypoint operation, press CANCEL.
 will appear, and an alarm will sound. To acknowledge the
 message and silence the alarm, wait 10 seconds or press
 ACKNOWLEDGE.                                                         Erasing a waypoint using the cursor
                                                                      In the chart application:


Using the chart                                                                                                                               73
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.   3. Using the SHOW BY softkey, select the SHOW BY GROUP
   Alternatively, select a waypoint from the Waypoint List.           option.
2. Press the ERASE WAYPOINT softkey.                               4. A list of available waypoint groups is displayed. Using the rotary
3. Press the YES softkey to confirm, or NO softkey to cancel.         control, select the waypoint group that you want to show or hide.
                                                                   5. Using the ON CHART softkey, select the SHOW or HIDE option,
Hiding a waypoint on the chart display                                as appropriate.
In the chart application:                                          6. Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each waypoint group you want to show
                                                                      or hide.
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.                          Showing and hiding waypoint symbols
3. Press the ON CHART softkey repeatedly until the HIDE option     In the chart application:
   is selected.
4. Press the OK button.                                            1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                   2. Press the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.
                                                                   3. Using the SHOW BY softkey, select the SHOW BY SYM option.
Waypoint appearance                                                4. A list of available waypoint symbols is displayed. Using the
                                                                      rotary control, select the waypoint symbol that you want to show
Showing and hiding waypoint names                                     or hide.
In the chart or radar application:                                 5. Using the ON CHART softkey, select the SHOW or HIDE option,
                                                                      as appropriate.
1. In the Chart application, press the PRESENTATION softkey.       6. Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each waypoint symbol you want to show
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.                             or hide.
3. Using the WAYPOINT NAME softkey, select the WAYPOINT
   NAME ON option to show waypoint names, or the WAYPOINT
   NAME OFF option to hide waypoint names.

 Note: Waypoints in an active route are always displayed,
 regardless of whether the display is set to show or hide.

Showing and hiding waypoint groups
In the chart application:
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.

74                                                                                                        C-Series Widescreen user reference
6.12 Routes                                                                      Note: A route can also be created from a track.

A route is a series of waypoints used to navigate a course.                     Up to 150 routes can be added to your system, each consisting of
A route is displayed on screen as a series of waypoints linked by a             up to 50 waypoints. As each waypoint is added, it is assigned an
line.                                                                           index number corresponding to its position in the route and drawn
                                                                                on the chart using the currently specified symbol. The following
 Route name       Sunda y Trip                                                  should be noted:
                                                                                · When a route is being built it is not active and does not affect
                                                        Waypoint                  any current navigation.
                                                                                · You can include a waypoint more than once in a route, but the
                                                        Route
                                                                                  same waypoint cannot be placed consecutively.




                                                                      D8327_1
                                                        destination
                                                                                · You can create a new route when the route list is full but on saving
                                                                                  this, you will be prompted to choose an existing route to overwrite.
With routes you can:
                                                                                · You cannot save a new route if any of the waypoints within it are
· Build a temporary route that you follow immediately (Quick                      currently active.
  Route). If you do not rename a quick route, it will be overwritten
  and its waypoints deleted when a new quick route is built.                    · The way in which the OK and CANCEL buttons operate is
                                                                                  different when you are building and editing routes.
· Build and save a route for later use, in which case the route is
  stored in the route list.
· Convert a track of your course into a route.                                  Building a route
Once created you have the option to view a route's details, amend               Building a route using new waypoints
its course, edit its name and color or erase it. All route options can
be accessed via the ROUTES softkey.                                             In the chart application:
                                                                                1. Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
Building a route
                                                                                2. Press the ROUTES softkey.
Routes can either be built on screen or via the waypoint list. A route          3. Press the BUILD NEW ROUTE softkey.
consists of:
                                                                                4. Using the trackpad, position the cursor at the desired position
· New waypoints that you have specifically placed for that route; or:              on the Chart.
                                                                                5. Press the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.
· Existing waypoints that are already stored in the system; or:
                                                                                6. Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each new waypoint, until the route is
· A combination of new and existing waypoints.                                     complete.

Using the chart                                                                                                                                      75
7. To follow the route immediately without saving it for future use      6. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey.
   (Quick Route), press the FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE softkey.                7. Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each existing waypoint you want to add
8. To save the route for future use, press the SAVE ROUTE softkey.          to the route, until the route is complete.
                                                                         8. To follow the route immediately without saving it for future use
 Note: If you place a waypoint at the wrong position, press the             (Quick Route), press the FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE softkey.
 UNDO WAYPOINT softkey.
                                                                         9. To save the route for future use, press the SAVE ROUTE softkey.

Building a route using existing waypoints                                 Note: If you insert a waypoint incorrectly into a route that you are
                                                                          building using the waypoint list, highlight the waypoint in the list
In the chart application:                                                 and press the REMOVE WAYPOINT softkey.
1.   Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
2.   Press the ROUTES softkey.                                           Building a route from a track
3.   Press the BUILD NEW ROUTE softkey.                                  Creating a route from a track enables you to retrace the course of
4.   Using the trackpad, position the cursor over an existing waypoint   that track.
     on the Chart.                                                       When a track is converted the system creates the closest route
5.   Press the USE THIS WAYPOINT softkey.                                through the recorded track, using the minimum number of
6.   Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each existing waypoint you want to add      waypoints. Each waypoint created will be saved with the depth and
     to the route, until the route is complete.                          temperature data (if applicable) for that position.
7.   To follow the route immediately without saving it for future use
     (Quick Route), press the FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE softkey.
8.   To save the route for future use, press the SAVE ROUTE softkey.

 Note: If you place a waypoint at the wrong position, press the
 UNDO WAYPOINT softkey.

Building a route using the waypoint list
In the chart application:
1.   NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.




                                                                                                                  D8366-1
2.   Press the ROUTES softkey.
3.   Press the BUILD NEW ROUTE softkey.
4.   Press the USE WAYPOINT LIST softkey.
5.   Using the trackpad, highlight the waypoint you want to use from
     the waypoint list.

76                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
On completion, the maximum deviation of the route from the             Adding a waypoint at the start of a route
recorded track is displayed and the new route is added to the route
list. It can now be displayed, edited and erased etc. in the same      In the chart application:
way as other routes in the system.                                     1.  Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
 Note: If a track break occurs, only the last segment is converted     2.  Press the ROUTES softkey.
 to a route.                                                           3.  Press the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey.
                                                                       4.  Using the trackpad or rotary control, select the route you want to
Building a route from the current track                                    add a waypoint to.
                                                                       5. Press the AMEND ROUTE COURSE softkey.
In the chart application:                                              6. Press the USE WAYPOINT LIST softkey.
1. Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.                               7. Press the trackpad right to highlight the right-hand column of
2. Press the TRACKS softkey.                                               the list.
3. Press the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey.                          8. Press the trackpad up until a new (empty) row is created at the
                                                                           top of the list.
4. Using the trackpad, select the track you want to create the route
   from.                                                               9. Press the trackpad left to highlight the left-hand column of the list.
5. Press the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey.                          10. Using the trackpad or rotary control, highlight the waypoint you
                                                                           want to insert at the start of the route.
6. Press the YES softkey to name the route, or NO to accept the
   default route name.                                                 11. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey.
A route will be created, and the current track will continue to be     12. Press the OK button.
recorded until you press the STOP TRACK softkey.
                                                                       Adding a waypoint within a route
Building a route from a saved track                                    In the chart application:
In the chart application:                                              1. In the Chart or Radar applications, use the trackpad to move the
1. , position the cursor over the track you want to create the route      cursor over the appropriate leg of the route.
   from.                                                               2. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey.
2. Press the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey.                          3. Using the trackpad, move the cursor so that it stretches the leg
3. Press the YES softkey to name the route, or NO to accept the           of the route to the desired position on the chart.
   default route name.                                                 4. Press the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.
A route will be created, and the current track will continue to be
recorded until you press the STOP TRACK softkey.                       Adding a waypoint to the end of a route
                                                                       In the chart application:
                                                                       1. Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
Using the chart                                                                                                                              77
2. Press the ROUTES softkey.                                                 · View the route list and then select the required route, or
3. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey.                                 · Select the required route on-screen.
4. Using the trackpad or rotary control, select the route you want to
    add a waypoint to.                                                       The TIME and SOG options can then be used to aid passage
                                                                             planning by displaying the time in hours or as an ETA and the SOG
5. Press the AMEND ROUTE COURSE softkey.
                                                                             as actual or planned. If the route is currently being navigated to
6. To define a new waypoint using the Chart, position the cursor             (active), the data is updated to show bearing, distance and time
    over the appropriate route leg, and then drag it to the new              from your current position.
    position and press the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.
7. To add a waypoint from the waypoint list, press the USE                   Displaying route details using the cursor
    WAYPOINT LIST softkey.
                                                                             In the chart application:
8. Press the trackpad right to highlight the right-hand column of
    the list.                                                                1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over any leg of the
9. Press the trackpad down until the last entry in the list is                  required route.
    highlighted.                                                             2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey.
10. Press the trackpad left to highlight the left-hand column of the list.   3. Using the trackpad, highlight the required route from the list.
11. Using the trackpad or rotary control, highlight the waypoint you         4. Press the ROUTE DETAILS softkey.
    want to insert at the start of the route.
12. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey.                                       Displaying route details using the route list
13. Press the OK button.                                                     In the chart application:
                                                                             1.   Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
Displaying the route list                                                    2.   Press the ROUTES softkey.
                                                                             3.   Press the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey.
In the chart application:
                                                                             4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the required route from the list.
1. Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.                                     5.   Press the ROUTE DETAILS softkey.
2. Press the ROUTES softkey.
3. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey.
                                                                             Following a route
Displaying route details                                                     When you are following a route the active route is shown on all
                                                                             chart windows.
Details of all routes that you create are held in the Route List.            When the distance to the next waypoint in the route is less than that
You can:                                                                     specified for the arrival alarm radius, or your vessel reaches the
                                                                             closest point of approach to the target (defined by a line passing

78                                                                                                                     C-Series Widescreen user reference
through the waypoint and perpendicular to the route leg), a warning   Following a route using the route list
dialog is displayed and an alarm sounds. Once the alarm is
acknowledged the next waypoint is selected, the display updates       In the chart application:
to indicate the next leg of the route, and the system sends the new   1. Press the GOTO softkey.
navigation data to the autopilot.
                                                                      2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey.
There are several ways to select the follow route option:             3. Using the trackpad or rotary control, select the route you want to
· Using Quick Route.                                                     follow.
                                                                      4. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE softkey.
· From a selected waypoint or any point within a route.
                                                                       Note: You can stop following a route at any time by pressing
· Using the route list.
                                                                       the STOP FOLLOW softkey.
· In reverse order.
                                                                      Following a route in reverse order
Following a route using quick route
                                                                      In the chart application:
In the chart application:
                                                                      1. Press the GOTO softkey.
1. Build your route.
                                                                      2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey.
2. After adding the final waypoint in your route, press the FOLLOW
   (QUICK) ROUTE softkey.                                             3. Using the trackpad or rotary control, select the route you want to
                                                                         follow.
 Note: You can stop following a route at any time by pressing         4. Press the REVERSE AND FOLLOW softkey.
 the STOP FOLLOW softkey.
                                                                       Note: You can stop following a route at any time by pressing
                                                                       the STOP FOLLOW softkey.
Following a route from a selected waypoint or point within a
route
                                                                      Advancing to the next waypoint in a route
In the chart application:
                                                                      While following a route in the chart application:
1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over the appropriate leg
   of the route, or a waypoint in the route.                          1. Press the GOTO softkey, or position the cursor over the route.
2. Press the FOLLOW THIS ROUTE or FOLLOW FROM HERE                    2. Press the ADVANCE WAYPOINT softkey.
   softkey.

 Note: You can stop following a route at any time by pressing
 the STOP FOLLOW softkey.


Using the chart                                                                                                                           79
 Note: If the current destination is the last waypoint, the chart       7. Press the EDIT NAME or EDIT COLOR softkey, as appropriate.
 advances on to the first waypoint in the route.                        8. Using the trackpad, select the new name of color for the route.
                                                                        9. Press the OK button to save the changes.
Resetting Cross Track Error (XTE)
                                                                         Note: If the route you are editing has been saved by pressing
While following a route in the chart application:                        the FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE softkey, the route is named
                                                                         "Quick Route" by default. Changing its name prevents it being
1. Press the RESTART XTE softkey.
                                                                         overwritten the next time the FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE softkey
                                                                         is used.
Editing a route
                                                                        Adjusting the thickness of route lines
Once you have created a route, it can be edited in a variety of ways.
                                                                        In the chart application:
You can:
                                                                        1.   Press the MENU button.
· Reverse a route.                                                      2.   Using the trackpad, select the Chart Setup option.
· Amend the course of a route (although you cannot edit a target        3.   Using the trackpad, select the Route Width menu item.
  waypoint that you are currently navigating to).                       4.   Using the trackpad, select the appropriate route line thickness.
· Change the name or color of a route.                                  5.   Press the OK button.
· Erase a route.
                                                                        Showing or hiding a route
 Note: An active route can be edited, with the exception of the
 target waypoint. If a waypoint being edited becomes the target,        In the chart application:
 then the system shall cancel the edit; the waypoint shall remain in    1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over the appropriate
 its original position.                                                    route.
                                                                        2. Press the HIDE ROUTE softkey.
Changing the name or color of a route
                                                                        Moving a waypoint within a route
In the chart application:
                                                                        In the chart application:
1.   Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
2.   Press the ROUTES softkey.                                          1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the waypoint you want
3.   Press the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey.                             to move.
4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the required route from the list.    2. Press the MOVE WAYPOINT softkey.
5.   Press the EDIT NAME AND COLOR softkey.                             3. Using the trackpad, move the cursor so that it stretches the leg
                                                                           of the route to the desired position on the chart.
6.   Using the trackpad, select the Name or Color field.

80                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
4. Press the OK button.                                                  Note: You can delete any route, except for the one that you are
                                                                         curently following. When you erase a route, only those waypoints
Removing a waypoint from a route                                         associated with that route are deleted.
In the chart application:
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the waypoint you want
   to remove.
2. Press the REMOVE WAYPOINT softkey.

Reversing a route
In the chart application:
1. Ensure that you are not following a route (press the STOP
    FOLLOW softkey to stop following a route).
2. Position the cursor over the appropriate route.
3. Press the REVERSE ROUTE softkey.
The waypoints in the route are renumbered, and the route name
is moved.


Erasing a route
In the chart application:
1.   Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
2.   Press the ROUTES softkey.
3.   Press the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey.
4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the required route from the list.
5.   Press the ERASE ROUTE softkey.
6.   Press the YES softkey to confirm the action, or the NO softkey to
     cancel the action.




Using the chart                                                                                                                         81
6.13 Tracks                                                          · Specify the distance between each track point.

You can create and save tracks to keep a permanent record of         Creating a Track
where you've been.                                                   When you want to record where you have been, you can use the
A track is an on-screen trail that represents the course you have    START TRACK softkey to start tracking your journey. The track will
taken. This trail is made up of a series of track points which are   then be created automatically as you navigate your vessel.
created automatically.                                               It is also possible to create a route from the track.


                                                                     Creating a track
                                                                     In the chart application:
                                                                     1. Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                     2. Press the TRACKS softkey.
                                                                     3. Press the START TRACK softkey.
                                                                     As you navigate your vessel, your journey is automatically recorded
                                                                     as a track.

                                                                      Note: If the power fails whilst a track is being recorded or the
                                                                      position fix is lost, a break will occur in the track. Only the last
                                                                      segment of a track can be converted into a route.


With tracks you can:                                                  Note: If the maximum number of tracking points is reached, you
                                                                      will be warned. The track will continue to be recorded with the
· Review where you have been.                                         earlier tracking points being overwritten.
· Retrace your original journey by converting the track to a route
  and automatically reversing it.
                                                                     Displaying the track list
If required, a track can be personalized and the track options
customized to your own particular needs. You can:                    In the chart application:
· Rename a track.                                                    1. Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
· Change the color of a track.                                       2. Press the TRACKS softkey.
· Specify the time period between track point creation.

82                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
3. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT TRACKS softkey.                            Erasing a track
                                                                        In the cfhart application:
Editing a track                                                         1.   , press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
Once you have created a track, it can be edited in a variety of ways.   2.   Press the TRACKS softkey.
                                                                        3.   Press the REVIEW AND EDIT TRACKS softkey.
You can:
                                                                        4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the required track from the list.
· Change the name of a track.                                           5.   Press the ERASE TRACK softkey.
· Change the color of a track.                                          6.   Press the YES softkey to confirm the action, or the NO softkey to
· Erase a track.                                                             cancel the action.

Changing the name or color of a track                                    Note: You can also erase all tracks, using the ARCHIVE AND
                                                                         TRANSFER function.
In the chart application:
1.   Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
2.   Press the TRACKS softkey.
3.   Press the REVIEW AND EDIT TRACKS softkey.
4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the required track from the list.
5.   Press the EDIT NAME AND COLOR softkey.
6.   Using the trackpad, select the Name or Color field.
7.   Press the EDIT NAME or EDIT COLOR softkey, as appropriate.
8.   Using the trackpad, select the new name of color for the track.
9.   Press the OK button to save the changes.

Showing or hiding a track
In the chart application:
1.   Press the NAVIGATION OPTIONS softkey.
2.   Press the TRACKS softkey.
3.   Press the REVIEW AND EDIT TRACKS softkey.
4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the required track from the list.
5.   Use the TRACK ON CHART softkey to select the SHOW or
     HIDE option, as appropriate.
Using the chart                                                                                                                             83
6.14 Measuring distances and bearings                                   1. Press the DATA button.
                                                                        2. Press the RULER softkey.
You can use the databar information and the ruler to measure            3. Press the CLEAR RULER softkey.
distances in the chart application.
You can determine the distance and bearing :
· from your boat to the position of the cursor;
· between two points on the chart.


Positioning the chart ruler
In the chart application:
1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor at the start point of your
   measurement or bearing.
2. Press the DATA button.
3. Press the RULER softkey.
4. Using the trackpad, position the cursor at the end point of your
   measurement or bearing. The range and bearing is displayed.
5. Press the OK button to fix the new ruler position.


Repositioning the chart ruler
In the chart application, with the ruler displayed:
1. Press the ADJUST A or ADJUST B softkey to select the start
   or end point, as appropriate.
2. Using the trackpad, move the cursor to the new ruler position.
3. Press the OK button to fix the new ruler position.


Clearing the chart ruler
In the chart application:

84                                                                                                          C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 7: Using the 3D chart

Chapter contents
·    7.1 3D chart overview on page 86
·    7.2 3D chart setup on page 87
·    7.3 3D chart cards on page 88
·    7.4 3D chart display overview on page 88




Using the 3D chart                              85
7.1 3D chart overview                                                   · What fishing pattern to use.
                                                                        · Safe routes.
The 3D chart provides a number of features to help you navigate
with your vessel.                                                       If the area that you are in is new to you, or visibility is poor, 3D
                                                                        cartography can help to give you the confidence to know where you
 Note: Before you can use the 3D chart applicaton, your                 are and what is around you. As with a conventional chart, active
 multifunction display must be receiving accurate heading and           waypoints and routes can also be shown on the 3D chart.
 position data from a suitable source (such as a GPS, for
 example). You must also have 3D chart cards containing 3D
 cartography for the appropriate area.

Safety
The 3D chart is an aid to visualization. When navigating with your
3D chart you should also check your 2D chart and ensure that a
route is safe. Until you are familiar with interpreting the 3D chart,
you should take every opportunity to compare the displayed objects
with visual targets, such as buoys and coastal structures. You
should practice harbour and coastal navigation during daylight and
in clear weather conditions. The simulator mode can also be used
to help you gain experience.
The 3D application should not be used as a substitute for good
navigational practice nor for official government paper charts. Do
not use this application before you have read this chapter.

Uses for the 3D Chart
3D cartography introduces an easy-to-use chart format that provides
you with a three dimensional graphical view of land and sea
contours around your boat. Land masses are shown in green, the
shade depending on the height above sea level. Water, the sea-bed
and submerged objects are shown in varying shades of blue.
Much of the information available on a conventional chart can be
shown in three dimensions, giving you an accurate easy-to-view
image of the area around your boat that can help you plan:
· Fishing spots.


86                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
7.2 3D chart setup                                                    Function               Description                  Options

You can configure a number of options to tailor the 3D chart          Vessel Symbol          The style of symbol that     · Sail
application to your requirements.                                                            represents your vessel
                                                                                             on screen.                   · Power
Ideally, the 3D chart application should be configured before first
use. You may also want to make additional adjustments as you          Vessel Size            Use this option to specify   · Tiny
become more familiar with the application.                                                   the size of the symbol
                                                                                             that represents your         · Small
 Note: Any changes that you make to the 3D chart configuration                               vessel on screen.            · Medium
 are retained when you power off the display.
                                                                                                                          · Large
                                                                                                                          · Huge
Selecting the 3D chart setup menu                                     Aerial Photo Overlay   Determines whether           · ON
In the 3D chart application:                                                                 an aerial photograph
                                                                                             is overlayed on the 3D       · OFF
1. Press the MENU button.                                                                    chart display.
2. Using the trackpad, select the 3D Chart Setup menu item, then      Chart Text             Determines whether           · ON
   press the trackpad right to select it.                                                    descriptive text (such
3. Use the trackpad to highlight the required menu option, then                              as place names, for          · OFF
   press the trackpad right to adjust the setting.                                           example) appears on
4. Press the OK button to save your changes.                                                 the chart.
                                                                      Navigation Marks       Determines whether           · ON
                                                                                             navigation marks appear
3D chart setup menu options                                                                  on the chart.                · OFF
The following table explains the options available in the 3D Chart
Setup Menu.

 Function                   Description                 Options
 Center-of-View Indicator   Determines whether a        · ON
                            white cross is displayed,
                            indicating the centre of    · OFF
                            view.


Using the 3D chart                                                                                                                   87
7.3 3D chart cards                                                     7.4 3D chart display overview
Before you can use the 3D chart application, you must have chart       The 3D chart application features a number of display modes to
cards containing the appropriate 3D cartographic data.                 help you navigate your vessel.
The 3D chart application relies on appropriate cartographic data       The following diagram show the various elements of the display:
stored on CompactFlash chart cards. You must have chart cards           Range                            Boat symbol          Mode                                                 Rotation
containing 3D cartographic data for the geographic area in which        Horizontal distance across       Boat's position on   Shows mode                                           Shows in degrees true
                                                                                                                                                                                                       ,
                                                                        screen (halfw ay up the window   chart. Select sail   application is                                       how far the on-screen
you want to navigate your vessel.                                       or at center of view).Shown in   or power boat.       working in.                                          view has been rotated
                                                                        selected system units.                                                                                     from your boat's heading
                                                                                                                                                                                                          .
Chart cards containing approriate 3D cartographic data are available
from the www.navionics.com web site.




                                                                                 Depth scale                   Wa ypoint      Center-of-view          Cartogr aphic objects            North arr ow
                                                                                 Approximate                   With arriv
                                                                                                                        al    White cross indicates   Select objects for display       3D indication ofTrue




                                                                                                                                                                                                              D11602_1
                                                                                 depth beneath                 circle         center of chart view    via the 3D Chart Setup           North in relation to
                                                                                 your boat.                                   at sea level.           menu.                            the chart view.




                                                                       3D chart view modes
                                                                       You can change the view provided by the 3D chart to give you a
                                                                       better view of your surroundings.
                                                                       The 3D chart application has two main viewing modes:
                                                                       · Active Motion mode
                                                                       · Planning mode

88                                                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
Active Motion mode                                                         The 3D chart places brackets around the view option listed
                                                                           immediately below the databar to indicate that the chart is in
This is the default mode when you open the 3D chart application,
                                                                           Planning mode. An example of this is (FWD).
provided that there is a valid fix. The screen shows an aerial view
of the 3D chart as if you are above your boat, slightly behind it and
looking forward (virtual eye point). You can also view the chart
from different positions relative to your boat. As your boat moves      3D Chart View Options
forward the chart automatically updates and reveals the changing
view ahead.                                                             Multiple 3D chart instances
                                                                        You can display multiple 3D chart views by creating a page that
 Note: In Active Motion mode, you can adjust the pitch when the         shows the 3D chart application in up to four windows at the same
 ADJUST ON softkey is set to CENTER, but rotating or panning            time.
 the chart will put it into Planning mode (see below).
                                                                        Each instance of the 3D chart application can be in Active Mode or
                                                                        Planning mode, as appropriate.
Planning mode
Planning mode enables you to view an area of the chart, different       Displaying multiple 3D charts
to the one in which you are navigating, so that you can analyze         1. Press and hold the PAGE button for three seconds, until the
locations and features. You can use the controls to view a particular       Select Page Set window appears.
area from different angles, bearings and ranges. The chart no
longer automatically keeps your boat on-screen. When you are in         2. Using the trackpad, highlight the page set that features the 3D
Planning mode, the controls and functions available are the same            chart application.
as for Active Motion mode.                                              3. Press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey to edit the highlighted page
                                                                            set.
Selecting the active motion 3D chart mode                               4. Press the softkey associated with the 3D chart application.
The 3D chart is in Active Motion mode by default. To return to this     5. Using the trackpad, highlight the page layout style that suits the
mode at any time:                                                           layout and number of instances of the 3D chart that you want.
                                                                        6. Press the OK button.
1. Press the FIND SHIP softkey.
                                                                        7. Using the trackpad, highlight the 3D chart application in the list.
    The 3D chart is re-drawn, with your vessel in the forward-looking   8. Press the OK button.
    view at your current position.                                      9. Press the ACTIVE button to select the next window that will host
                                                                            an instance of the 3D chart application.
Selecting the planning 3D chart mode
                                                                        10. Repear steps 8 to 9 until you have all the instances of the 3D
1. Using the trackpad, pan to the area of the chart that you want           chart application that you require.
   to view.



Using the 3D chart                                                                                                                          89
11. Press the OK button.                                               When one of these options is selected, the viewpoint of the 3D chart
                                                                       is changed to show a different area.
3D chart depth scale
                                                                       The vessel view mode that you are currently in is indicated just
The depth scale view option enables you to add an indicator            below the databar.
beneath your vessel on the display, providing a visual approximation
of the water depth immediately below your vessel.                      Changing the 3D chart vessel view mode
This depth scale moves up and down to indicate the approximate         In the 3D chart application:
depth below your vessel. Areas of water that are deeper than the
depth scale limit are shaded. Areas of water that are shallower than   1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
the depth scale limit are shown in a lighter shade.                    2. Press the 3D VIEW OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                       3. Press the VIEW TO softkey until the FWD, STB, AFT, or PRT
Enabling or disabling the 3D chart depth scale
                                                                          option is selected, as appropriate.
In the 3D chart application:                                           4. Press the OK button.
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                     3D chart vessel offset
2. Press the 3D VIEW OPTIONS softkey.                                  The 3D chart Vessel Offset options determine the position of your
3. Press the DEPTH SCALE softkey until the ON or OFF option is         vessel in relation to the chart.
   selected, as appropriate.
                                                                       You can specify whether the boat is fixed in the centre of the window
4. Press the OK button.
                                                                       (0 offset) or offset by 1/3 or 2/3 of the screen. If you change the
                                                                       offset to 1/3 or 2/3, the view ahead of your boat will be increased.
3D chart vessel view modes
The 3D chart vessel view modes provide different perspectives of       Changing the 3D chart vessel offset
your vessel on the 3D chart display
                                                                       In the 3D chart application:
There are four viewing options:
                                                                       1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
· Forward (FWD) -- provides a viewpoint above and behind your          2. Press the 3D VIEW OPTIONS softkey.
  vessel, looking forward. This is the default option.
                                                                       3. Press the VESSEL OFFSET softkey until the 0, 1/3, or 2/3 option
· Starboard (STB) -- provides a viewpoint above and to the port of        is selected, as appropriate.
  your vessel, looking starboard.                                      4. Press the OK button.
· Aft (AFT) -- provides a viewpoint above and in front of your
  vessel, looking aft.                                                 3D chart detail exaggeration
                                                                       You can exaggerate the vertical size of objects on the 3D chart to
· Port (PRT) -- provides a viewpoint above and to the starboard        make it easier to interpret what you are seeing.
  of your vessel, looking to port.

90                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
Sometimes it is easier to see certain topographical features if they    Aerial photo overlay on 3D chart
are exaggerated. Adjusting the exaggeration has the effect of
vertically stretching objects on the chart, making it easier to see     You can overlay an aerial photograph on the 3D chart display to
their shape and position. This could be particularly helpful if you     help you interpret your surroundings.
are fishing, for example.                                               Aerial photos cover the navigable waters up to 3 miles inside the
                                                                        coastline. Beyond these limits the land will appear green (color
Adjusting the 3D chart exaggeration                                     charts) and grey (black and white charts). The level of resolution
In the 3D chart application:                                            and the availability of a colored overlay is dependent on the region
                                                                        covered by the chart card.
1.   Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                        The following images show the difference between the standard 3D
2.   Press the 3D VIEW OPTIONS softkey.                                 chart display, and the 3D chart display with aerial photo overlay:
3.   Press the ADJUST EXAGGERATION softkey.
4.   Using the trackpad, select the required amount of exaggeration.
5.   Press the OK button.

3D chart decluttering
You can declutter the 3D chart to reduce the amount of objects
and detail shown.
Navigating in an area that shows a lot of information on the chart,
such as navigation marks, can be confusing. Depending on your
chart view level it can make features or even your position difficult
to see. Declutter helps you to reduce this confusion and make the
chart clearer, by removing some objects from view.




                                                                                                                                               D11603_1
                                                                         Standar d 3D image                 3D image with aeria   l overlay
Decluttering the 3D chart
In the 3D chart application:
                                                                        Overlaying an aerial photo on the 3D chart
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                        In the 3D chart application:
2. Press the DECLUTTER softkey until the ON or OFF option is
   selected, as appropriate.                                            1. Press the MENU button.
3. Press the OK button.                                                 2. Using the trackpad, select the 3D Chart Setup menu item, then
                                                                           press the trackpad right to select it.
                                                                        3. Using the trackpad, select the Aerial Photo Overlay menu item.


Using the 3D chart                                                                                                                            91
4. Using the trackpad, select the ON option to enable aerial photo     1. Press the ADJUST ON softkey until the EYE option is selected
   overlay, or the OFF option to disable it.                              to rotate or pitch around a virtual eye point. Select the CENTER
5. Press the OK button.                                                   option to rotate or pitch around the center-of-view cross on the
                                                                          screen.
                                                                       2. Press the ADJUST softkey until the ROTATE or PITCH option is
3D Chart Navigation                                                       selected, as appropriate.
                                                                       3. Press the OK button.
Moving around the 3D chart
                                                                       Navigating to a waypoint using the 3D chart
In the 3D chart application:
                                                                       In the 3D chart application:
1. Use the trackpad to move move the cursor to a different area on
   the 3D chart.                                                       1. Press the GOTO softkey.
2. Press the Range Out button to show a larger area of the 3D          2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.
   chart.
                                                                          The Waypoint List is displayed.
3. Press the Range In button to show a smaller area of the 3D chart.
                                                                       3. Using the trackpad, select the waypoint you want to navigate to.
Locating your vessel on the 3D chart                                   4. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.
In the 3D chart application:                                           Following a route using the 3D chart
1. Press the FIND SHIP softkey.                                        In the 3D chart application:
     The 3D chart is re-drawn, with the boat in the forward-looking    1. Press the GOTO softkey.
     view at your current position.                                    2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey.
Marking your position on the 3D chart                                     The Route List is displayed.
                                                                       3. Using the trackpad, select the route you want to follow.
In the 3D chart application:
                                                                       4. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE softkey.
1. Press the WPTS MOB button twice.
   The Edit Waypoint dialog is displayed.
2. Press the WPTS MOB button again to accept the default
                                                                       Using the 2D and 3D charts together
   waypoint name, or enter a new name.                                 You can display both the 2D and 3D charts on-screen at the same
3. Press the OK button.                                                time to aid your navigation.
Rotating and pitching your vessel in the 3D chart                      If the area in which you are navigating is unfamiliar, or visibility is
                                                                       poor, working with 2D and 3D chart applications on the screen
In the 3D chart application:                                           side-by-side can give you extra confidence and help you find out

92                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
what is around you. With the charts displayed side by side, a            · Pressing FIND SHIP from any synchronized application returns
comprehensive view of the surrounding area is available. As with all       the 3D chart to the default Active Motion mode, and synchronizes
multiple page sets, the active window is indicated by a red border.        the 2D chart to the same view.
To make changes to an application it must be the active window.
                                                                         · Any changes made to the heading, range or position in either 2D
Displaying 2D and 3D charts simultaneously                                 or 3D charts will be displayed in both 2D and 3D windows.

1. Press and hold the PAGE button for three seconds, until the           · If the 2D chart view for the current window is set to SYSTEM
    Select Page Set window appears.                                        and you have multiple windows on a page or on more than
                                                                           one multifunction display, any changes made to a chart will be
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the page set that features the 3D         reflected in all windows and all multifunction displays.
    chart application.
3. Press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey to edit the highlighted page          · If the 2D chart view for the current window is set to LOCAL, no
    set.                                                                   other windows will be affected.
4. Press the softkey associated with the 3D chart application.           · You can synchronize the 2D chart with the 3D chart OR the radar,
5. Using the trackpad, highlight a page layout style that includes         but you cannot synchronize the 2D chart with both the 3D chart
    two windows.                                                           and the radar.
6. Press the OK button.
7. Using the trackpad, highlight the 3D chart application in the list.
8. Press the OK button.                                                  Synchronizing the 2D and 3D charts
9. Press the ACTIVE button to select the second window, which will       In the 2D or 3D chart application:
    host the 2D chart application.
10. Repeat Steps 2 to 8 to select the 2D chart.                          1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
11. Press the OK button.                                                 2. Press the CHART VIEW softkey until the SYSTEM option is
                                                                            selected.
                                                                         3. Press the CHART MODE AND PRESENTATION softkey.
2D and 3D chart synchronization                                          4. Press the CHART SYNC softkey until the 3D option is selected.
                                                                         5. Press the OK button.
You can synchronize the heading, range, and position information
across both the 2D and 3D charts to aid navigation.
When 2d-3D chart synchronization is enabled:                             3D chart view locator
· When 2D-3D synchronization is enabled, it is indicated by "2D-3D       You can show a 3D view locator on the 2D chart to indicate the
  Sync" in the chart application status bar.                             boundaries of the area currently shown on the 3D chart.
· Some softkey functions are not available with this feature, and
  are "grayed-out".

Using the 3D chart                                                                                                                           93
The 3D view locator is a polygon outlined in blue that can be
overlayed on the 2D chart. As you rotate and pitch the vessel
symbol on the display, or use the pan and zoom controls, the blue
polygon moves on the 2D chart to indicate the boundaries of the
area currently shown on the 3D chart.

Displaying the 3D view locator on the 2D chart
In the 2D chart application:
1.   Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2.   Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
3.   Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.
4.   Using the trackpad, select the 3D Locator option.
5.   Using the trackpad, select the ON option.
6.   Press the OK button.




94                                                                  C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 8: Using autopilot control

Chapter contents
·    8.1 Disengaging the autopilot in an emergency on page 96
·    8.2 Autopilot control on page 96
·    8.3 Autopilot control options on page 98
·    8.4 Autopilot alarms on page 98




Using autopilot control                                         95
8.1 Disengaging the autopilot in an                       8.2 Autopilot control
emergency                                                 You can use your multifunction display to control your autopilot.
While following a route using the autopilot:               Note: For information on connecting an autopilot control head
1. Press and release the POWER button.                     to your multifunction display, refer to the documentation that
                                                           accompanies the autopilot control head.
2. Press the PILOT STANDBY softkey.
The autopilot is disengaged, and put into standby mode.   With the Autopilot Control function enabled, you can use your
                                                          multifunction display to:
                                                          · Engage the autopilot and instruct it to follow waypoints in a route.
                                                          · Disengage the autopilot.
                                                          · Silence the waypoint arrival alarm.

                                                          Pilot Control dialog
                                                          The autopilot control functions on your multifunction display are
                                                          centered around the Pilot Control dialog. This dialog is displayed in
                                                          the following situations:
                                                          · When you press the GOTO or FOLLOW ROUTE softkey in the
                                                            chart application.
                                                          · When you are following a route, and place the cursor over an
                                                            active route or waypoint on the chart, and press the STOP GOTO,
                                                            STOP FOLLOW, or ADVANCE WAYPOINT softkey.
                                                          · When you arrive at a target waypoint.


                                                          Autopilot status symbols
                                                          The various autopilot status modes are represented on your
                                                          multifunction display by symbols.
                                                          The autopilot-related modes are indicated by a symbol displayed
                                                          in the databar of your multifunction display.
                                                          These symbols are described in the following table:

96                                                                                                C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Symbol                   Description                     2. Using the trackpad, highlight the System Setup menu item, then
                                                             press the trackpad right to select it.
                          Autopilot is in Standby mode.   3. Using the trackpad, highlight the System Integration menu item,
                                                             then press the trackpad right to select it.
                          Autopilot is in Track mode.     4. Using the trackpad, highlight the Autopilot Control menu item,
                                                             then press the trackpad right to select it.
                                                          5. Using the trackpad, select the Enabled option.
                          Autopilot is in Auto mode.      6. Press the OK button.


                          No autopilot detected.          Engaging the autopilot
                                                          In the chart application:
                          Autopilot alarm active.
                                                          1. Press the GOTO softkey.
                                                          2. Press the GOTO CURSOR, FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS, or
                          Dodge mode is active.              GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey, as appropriate.
                                                          3. Press the ENGAGE PILOT softkey.
                          Fish Mode is active.               The Pilot Control dialog is displayed.
                                                          4. Press the appropriate softkey to enable the autopilot.
                          Autopilot calibration.

                                                          Disengaging the autopilot
                          Power steering active.
                                                          In the chart application with the autopilot engaged:

                          Wind Vane mode is active.       1. Press the STOP GOTO or STOP FOLLOW softkeys:
                                                             The Pilot Control dialog is displayed.
                                                          2. Press the STANDBY softkey.
                                                             The autopilot is disengaged, and put in standby mode.
Enabling the autopilot control function
1. Press the MENU button.


Using autopilot control                                                                                                   97
8.3 Autopilot control options                                                 8.4 Autopilot alarms
Your multifunction display enables you to navigate to target                  The autopilot functions provide alarms to alert you to situations that
waypoints using the autopilot control options.                                require action.
When you arrive at a waypoint, the Pilot Control dialog is displayed,         Your multifunction display shows autopilot alarms, regardless of
providing the following options:                                              whether there is active navigation on the system. If pilot integration
                                                                              is enabled, and an alarm is raised by the autopilot, the multifunction
 Option                            Description                                display provides an audible alarm sound (providing that the alarm
                                                                              has not already been silenced). The Pilot Control screen is
 ENGAGE PILOT -- TRACK             Engages the autopilot and continues        displayed, indicating a new alarm. Additionally, the pilot transducer
                                   to the next waypoint in the route. This    icon is displayed in red, and remains red until the alarm is cleared.
                                   option is not available if you have
                                   reached the last waypoint in the route.
 CLEAR ALARM                       Silences the waypoint arrival alarm.       Silencing autopilot alarms
                                   Engages the autopilot in auto mode,
                                                                              1. Press the CLEAR ALARM softkey.
                                   continuing on the current heading.
                                                                              The alarm is silenced and the autopilot remains engaged in auto
 STANDBY                           Cancels the waypoint arrival alarm         mode, continuing on the current heading.
                                   and disengages the autopilot.
 AUTO                              Cancels the waypoint arrival alarm and     Silencing autopilot alarms and disengaging
                                   engages the autopilot in auto mode. If
                                   you just arrived at the last waypoint in   autopilot
                                   the route, the autopilot continues on
                                   the current locked heading.                1. Press the STANDBY softkey.
                                                                              The alarm is silenced, and the autopilot is disengaged and put in
                                                                              standby mode.




98                                                                                                                    C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 9: Using radar

Chapter contents
·    9.1 Radar overview on page 100
·    9.2 Radar scanner power modes on page 100
·    9.3 Radar range and image quality on page 101
·    9.4 Radar display overview on page 104
·    9.5 Dual range radar operation (digital scanners only) on page 105
·    9.6 Radar mode and orientation on page 106
·    9.7 Radar tuning -- DIGITAL scanners on page 109
·    9.8 Radar tuning -- ANALOG scanners on page 114
·    9.9 Waypoints on page 120
·    9.10 Using radar to measure distances, ranges, and bearings on page 121
·    9.11 Using radar to track targets and avoid collisions on page 124
·    9.12 Radar alarms on page 128
·    9.13 Setting up your radar on page 129




Using radar                                                                    99
9.1 Radar overview                                                     9.2 Radar scanner power modes
Radar is used to provide information that can help you to track        The radar scanner has a number of power modes.
targets and measure distances and bearings.
                                                                       The radar scanner icon in the databar indicates the power status of
Radio Detection And Ranging (RADAR) is used at sea to detect the       the radar scanner. The following is an explanation of each status:
presence of objects (known as `targets') at a distance, and if they
are moving, detect their speed.                                         Radar      Radar Status
Radar works by transmitting radio pulses, then detecting reflections    Mode       Icon               Description of status
of these pulses (echoes) from objects in the area and displaying the
                                                                        Transmit                      Rotating icon, signifying that the scanner
reflections as targets on your display.
                                                                        (TX)                          is on and transmitting. When SCANNER
Until you are familiar with interpreting the radar display, every                                     is set to ON, select this mode to activate
opportunity should be taken to compare the radar screen patterns                                      the scanner. This is the usual mode of
with visual targets, such as other boats, buoys and coastal                                           operation.
structures. You should practise harbor and coastal navigation during
daylight hours and in clear weather conditions.                         Standby                       Static icon, indicating that the scanner is
                                                                        (STBY)                        on but not transmitting, and the antenna is
                                                                                                      not rotating. Antenna does not rotate, the
Digital radar                                                                                         scanner does not transmit and the radar
                                                                                                      data is removed from the screen. This is a
Your multifunction display can be used with digital radar scanners.                                   power save mode used when radar is not
                                                                                                      needed for short time periods. When you
Digital radar scanners provide a range of advantages over analog                                      return to transmit mode, the magnetron
radar, making it easier to discern objects around your vessel.                                        does not need to warm up. This is the
Digital radar scanners provide:                                                                       default mode.

· Improved target detection.                                            Off                           Scanner powered off when radar not
                                                                                                      required, but display is in use for other
· Full-color image.                                                                                   applications, such as the chart. When
                                                                                                      selected, the system counts down. During
· Dual Range operation.
                                                                                                      this time you cannot re-power the scanner.
· SuperHD option. This effectively increases the transmitter power
                                                                        Timed                         Scanner switches between on/transmitting,
  by a factor of at least two, and reduces the beamwidth by a
                                                                        Transmit                      and standby mode. Scanner goes into
  similar amount.
                                                                                                      power save mode when constant use of
 Note: You must connect a SuperHD radar scanner in order to                                           radar is not required.
 use the SuperHD option.


100                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
Powering the radar scanner on and off                               9.3 Radar range and image quality
In the radar application:
1. Press the POWER button on your multifunction display.
                                                                    Maximum radar range
2. Using the relevant softkeys, select the operating mode for the   The usable range of the radar is limited by factors such as the
   radar scanner.                                                   height of the scanner, and height of the target.
                                                                    Maximum radar range is essentially line-of-sight, so is limited by
                                                                    the height of the scanner and the height of the target as illustrated
                                                                    below:
                                                                                                                    Rmax

                                                                                                  a1                                       a2

                                                                                                                   Earth
                                                                         h                                                                                           H
                                                                              Radar                        Rmax = 2.23 (   h + H     )                       Cliff
                                                                                           Rmax              maximum radar range         in nautical miles
                                                                                           h                 radar antenna height        in metres
                                                                                           H                 target height               in metres
                                                                                      Rmax = radar horizon of antenna a
                                                                                                                      ( 1) + radar horizon of target a




                                                                                                                                                                          D1643-3
                                                                                                                                                     ( 2)




                                                                    The table below shows typical maximum radar ranges for various
                                                                    radar antenna heights and target heights. Remember that although
                                                                    the radar horizon is greater than the optical horizon, the radar
                                                                    can only detect targets if a large enough target is above the radar
                                                                    horizon.

                                                                     Antenna height                    Target height                         Maximum range
                                                                     (meters)                          (meters)                              (Nautical miles)
                                                                     3                                 3                                     7.7
                                                                     3                                 10                                    10.9
                                                                     5                                 3                                     8.8




Using radar                                                                                                                                                              101
 Antenna height         Target height         Maximum range                                                Main lobe
 (meters)               (meters)              (Nautical miles)
 5                      10                    12                                                    Side             Side
                                                                                                    lobe             lobe

                                                                                                           Antenna
Radar image quality
A number of factors can affect the quality of a radar image, including
echoes, sea clutter, and other interference.
Not all radar echoes are produced by valid targets. Spurious echoes
may be caused by:
· Side lobes.




                                                                                                                         D1638-4
                                                                             Arc        True echo          Side echoes
· Indirect echoes.
· Multiple echoes.
· Blind sectors.                                                         Indirect Echoes

· Sea, rain, or snow clutter.                                            There are several types of indirect echoes or ghost images. These
                                                                         sometimes have the appearance of true echoes, but in general they
· Interference.                                                          are intermittent and poorly defined.
Through observation, practice, and experience, you can generally
detect these conditions very quickly and use the radar controls to         False echo                True echo                                 True echo
minimize them.

Side Lobes
Side lobe patterns are produced by small amounts of energy from
the transmitted pulses that are radiated outside the narrow main
beam. The effects of side lobes are most noticeable with targets at
short ranges (normally below 3 nm), and in particular with larger
objects. Side lobe echoes form either arcs on the radar screen             Passing                                Mast
                                                                           ship                                   or funnel                    False echo




                                                                                                                                                            D1641-4
similar to range rings, or a series of echoes forming a broken arc.




102                                                                                                                    C-Series Widescreen user reference
Multiple Echoes
Multiple echoes are not very common but can occur if there is a large
target with a wide vertical surface at a comparatively short range.
The transmitted signal will be reflected back and forth between the
target and your own ship, resulting in multiple echoes, displayed
beyond the range of the true target echo, but on the same bearing.
                                                        True echo




                                                                                                                       D3968-4
                                     Multiple echoes
                                                                                 Rain or Snow Clutter




                                                                       D1642-3
                                                                                 The radar can see echoes from rain or snow. Returns from storm
                                                                                 areas and rain squalls consist of countless small echoes that
Blind Sectors                                                                    continuously change size, intensity and position. These returns
Obstructions such as funnels and masts near the radar antenna                    sometimes appear as large hazy areas, depending on the intensity
may obstruct the radar beam and cause radar shadows or `blind                    of the rainfall or snow in the storm cell.
sectors'. If the obstruction is relatively narrow, there will be a
reduction of the beam intensity, though not necessarily a complete
cut-off. However, for wider obstructions there may be a total loss of
signal in the shadow area. There may also be multiple echoes which
extend behind the obstruction. Blind sector effects can normally be
minimized by careful selection of the scanner site prior to installation.

Sea Clutter
Radar returns from waves around the vessel can clutter the centre
of the radar picture, making it difficult to detect real targets. Such
`sea clutter' usually appears as multiple echoes on the display at
short range scales, and the echoes are not repetitive or consistent




                                                                                                                       D3967-4
in position. With high winds and extreme conditions, echoes from
sea clutter may cause dense background clutter in the shape of
an almost solid disc.


Using radar                                                                                                                                    103
Interference                                                             9.4 Radar display overview
When two or more radar-equipped vessels are operating within
range of each other mutual radar interference can occur. This            With your radar scanner connected and the radar in transmit mode,
usually appears as a spiral of small dots from the display centre This   the radar picture provides a map-like representation of the area
type of interference is most noticeable at long ranges.                  in which the radar is operating.
                                                                                           Orientation Motion mode                                   Range ring spacing

                                                                          Data bar                                                                                        Radar
                                                                                                                                                                          status
                                                                          Range      3nm    Head-Up     Re lativ e Motion                               Rings   ½ nm      icon



                                                                                                                                                                          Land-
                                                                                                                                                                          mass
                                                                                                                                                                          Ship's
                                                                                                                                                                          heading
                                                                                                                                                                          marker
                                                                          Boat's
                                         D6601-2                          position



                                                                          Waypoint
                                                                                                                                                                          Range
                                                                          Surface                                                                                         ring
                                                                          vessel
                                                                                                        TARGET                          ENHANCE




                                                                                                                                                                                    D6803-3
                                                                                       VRM/EBL...                           GAIN...                    PRESENT ATION...
                                                                                                      TRACKING...                       ECHOES ...




                                                                         Typically, your boat's position is at the centre of the display, and its
                                                                         dead ahead bearing is indicated by a vertical heading line, known
                                                                         as the Ship's Heading Marker (SHM).
                                                                         On-screen targets may be large, small, bright or faint, dependent
                                                                         on the size of the object, its orientation and surface. If using an
                                                                         analog radar scanner, strongest target returns are displayed in
                                                                         yellow with weaker returns in two shades of blue. If using a digital
                                                                         radar scanner, stronger target returns show as different colors from
                                                                         a range of 256 colors, providing better clarity. Be aware that the size
                                                                         of a target on screen is dependent on many factors and may not
                                                                         necessarily be proportional to its physical size. Nearby objects may
                                                                         appear to be the same size as a distant larger objects.


104                                                                                                                                   C-Series Widescreen user reference
With experience, the approximate size of different objects can be       9.5 Dual range radar operation (digital
determined by the relative size and brightness of the echoes.
                                                                        scanners only)
You should bear in mind that the size of each on-screen target is
affected by:                                                            Dual Range radar operation enables you to view two ranges at the
                                                                        same time, in separate windows.
· The physical size of the reflecting object.
                                                                        Using your multifunction display and a digital radar scanner, you
· The material from which the object is made. Metallic surfaces         can view either a short or a long range image in separate radar
  reflect signals better than non-metallic.                             windows. To allow this, Dual Range must be enabled in the Radar
· Vertical objects such as cliffs reflect signals better than sloping   Setup Menu (MENU > Radar Setup > Scanner Setup).
  objects such as sandbanks.                                            The default setting is Long, which provides a standard scanner
· High coastlines and mountainous coastal regions can be observed       range. The Short setting provides a maximum range of three
  at longer radar ranges. Therefore, the first sight of land may be a   nautical miles. The Long range value cannot be less than the
  mountain several miles inland from the coastline. Although the        current Short range value. For example, if Short range is set to
  coastline may be much nearer, it may not appear on the radar          3nm, Long range cannot be less than 3nm.
  until the vessel is closer to shore.
                                                                        Limitations
· Some targets, such as buoys and small boats, can be difficult
  to discern, because they do not present a consistent reflecting       · Dual Range operation is not available if MARPA is ON.
  surface as they bob and toss about in the waves. Consequently,        · You cannot acquire MARPA targets if Dual Range is enabled.
  these echoes tend to fade and brighten and at times, to disappear
  momentarily.                                                          · Chart-sync and chart overlay are temporarily disabled when Dual
                                                                          Range is enabled.
· Buoys and small boats often resemble each other, but boats can
  often be distinguished by their motion.                               Using Dual Range with SuperHD radar
 Note: You will need heading and position data for full functionality   When using the Short Dual Range option, a SuperHD radar
 of your radar. A fast heading sensor is also needed for operation      operates in HD mode only. When using the Long Dual Range
 of MARPA and can maximize the performance of radar/chart               option, a SuperHD radar operates in SuperHD mode for all ranges:
 overlay.
                                                                         Dual Range            Range covered          Operation
                                                                         LONG                  1/8nm to 72nm          SuperHD
                                                                         SHORT                 1/8nm to 1½nm          HD




Using radar                                                                                                                                105
Enabling Dual Range radar operation                                9.6 Radar mode and orientation
In the radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                   Radar orientation modes
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Radar Setup menu item, then   The radar can operate in a number of orientation modes to suit
   press the trackpad right to select it.                          different types of navigation.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Scanner Setup menu item,
                                                                   The orientation of the radar refers to the relationship between the
   then press the trackpad right to select it.
                                                                   radar and the direction that you are travelling in. There are three
4. Using the trackpad, highlight the Dual Range menu item, then    orientation modes to choose from:
   press the trackpad right to select it.
5. Using the trackpad, select the ON option.                       · Head up.
6. Press the OK button.                                            · North up.
                                                                   · Course up.
Selecting long or short range radar operation                      These orientation modes are used in conjunction with motion mode
                                                                   to control how your boat and radar relate to one another and how
In the radar application:                                          they are displayed on screen. Any changes that you make to the
                                                                   orientation of the radar are retained when you switch off your
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                 multifunction display.
2. Press the RADAR MODE & OPERATION softkey.
3. Press the DUAL RANGE softkey repeatedly until the LONG or       Head Up (H-UP)
   SHORT option is selected, as appropriate.                       This is the default mode for the radar application.
4. Press the OK button.                                                   e.g:
                                                                                         N




                                                                                                                                N
                                                                             Ship's Heading Marker (SHM)      As your boat's heading changes:
                                                                             (indicating the boat's current     SHM fixed upwards
                                                                             heading) is upwards




                                                                                                                                                    D8398_1
                                                                                                                Radar picture rotates accordingly




106                                                                                                                   C-Series Widescreen user reference
North Up (N-UP)                                                                   Course Up (C-UP)
          e.g:                                                                            e.g:
                         N                       N
                                                                                                            N                          N




                 True north at top   As your boat's heading changes:                                                       As your boat's heading changes:
                                                                                                 Current course upwards      Radar picture fixed
                                       Radar picture fixed (north up)
                                       SHM rotates accordingly                                                               SHM rotates accordingly




                                                                                                                                                              D8400_1
                                                                        D8399_1
 Note: If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode,                   If you select a new course, the picture will reset to display the new
 a warning message will be shown, the status bar indicates                        course upwards.
 North-Up in brackets and the radar uses 0° heading in relative                   The reference used for Course-Up depends upon the information
 motion. When heading data becomes available once more,                           available at a given time. The system always prioritizes this
 North-Up mode is reinstated.                                                     information in the following order:
                                                                                  1. Bearing from origin to destination, that is, intended course.
 Note: It is not possible to select Head Up mode when the motion
 mode is set to True.                                                             2. Locked heading from an Autopilot.
                                                                                  3. Bearing to waypoint.
                                                                                  4. Instantaneous heading.
                                                                                   Note: If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode,
                                                                                   a warning message will be shown, the status bar indicates the
                                                                                   Course Up in brackets and the radar uses 0° heading in relative
                                                                                   motion. When heading data becomes available once more,
                                                                                   Course-Up mode is reinstated.

                                                                                  Selecting the radar orientation mode
                                                                                  In the radar application:
Using radar                                                                                                                                                  107
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the RADAR MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
3. Using the ORIENTATION softkey, select the required orientation
   mode.


Changing the radar vessel offset
In the radar application:




                                                                                                                                                   D6842-2
                                                                                                       1/ offset                    2/ offset
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                                0 offset               3                            3

2. Press the RADAR MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
3. Using the VESSEL OFFSET softkey, select the required vessel          The default motion mode is "Relative", with zero offset.
   offset.
                                                                        True Motion (TM)
                                                                        When the motion mode is set to True, fixed radar targets maintain a
Radar motion modes overview                                             constant position and moving vessels (including your boat) travel
                                                                        in true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses on the
The motion mode controls the relationship between the radar and         screen. As the boat's position approaches the edge of the screen,
your boat. There are two modes:                                         the radar picture is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead.
· Relative motion.                                                       Note: If heading and position data become unavailable when
· True motion.                                                           True motion is selected, a warning message will be shown, the
                                                                         mode will revert to relative motion and be noted in the status bar
The selected motion mode is displayed in the status bar. The default     in brackets, for example, (TM).
setting is relative motion with zero offset.

Relative Motion (RM) with optional Vessel Offset                         Note: It is not possible to select True Motion when the orientation
                                                                         is set to Head Up.
When the motion mode is set to Relative, the position of your boat
is fixed on the screen and all the targets move relative to the boat.
                                                                        Selecting the radar motion mode
You can specify whether the boat is fixed in the centre of the window
(0 offset) or offset by 1/3 or 2/3 to increase the view ahead, as       In the radar application:
shown below:
                                                                        1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                        2. Press the RADAR MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
                                                                        3. Using the MOTION MODE softkey, select the relevant mode.

108                                                                                                                C-Series Widescreen user reference
9.7 Radar tuning -- DIGITAL scanners                                                 Tuning method   Related options              Description

You can use the gain presets and other functions to improve the                                      · Rain -- the radar
quality of the radar picture.                                                                          scanner detects
                                                                                                       echoes from rain or
 Tuning method               Related options              Description                                  snow. These echoes
                                                                                                       appear on screen
 Gain presets                For each preset, the         The digital radar                            as countless small
                             following options are        gain presets enable                          echoes continuously
 · Buoy -- a special         available:                   you to quickly select                        changing size,
   mode that enhances                                     pre-configured settings
                             · Gain -- enables you                                                     intensity and position.
   the detection of small                                 to achieve the best
                               to use a preset in                                                      Turning the rain
   objects like mooring                                   picture in different
                               fully automatic mode,                                                   clutter function on
   buoys. It is useful at                                 situations. Raymarine
                               or to adjust its gain                                                   suppresses the bulk
   ranges up to 0.75nm.                                   strongly recommends
                               manually between 0                                                      effect of rain returns
 · Harbor -- this is the                                  the use of these presets                     from around your
                               and 100%.                  to achieve optimum
   default mode. This                                                                                  vessel, making it
   setting takes account     · Color Gain-- adjusts       results. However, each                       easier to recognize
   of land clutter so that     the intensity (color) of   of the gain presets can                      other objects.
   smaller targets, like       displayed targets, but     be manually adjusted
                               does not significantly     using gain, color gain,                    · Sea Gain -- radar
   navigation buoys, are
                               affect the number of       rain, and sea gain                           echoes from waves
   not lost.
                               targets displayed.         functions.                                   around your vessel
 · Coastal -- accounts         Increasing the                                                          can clutter the center
   for the slightly higher     color gain causes                                                       of the radar picture,
   levels of sea clutter       more targets to be                                                      making it difficult
   you might encounter         displayed in the same                                                   to detect real targets.
   out of harbor and           color, which may help                                                   Adjusting the sea gain
   adjusts the radar           you to determine                                                        reduces this clutter for
   display accordingly.        whether an object                                                       up to 5 nautical miles
                               is an actual target,                                                    (depending on wave
 · Offshore --                                                                                         and sea conditions)
   automatically adjusts       or just background
                               noise. Reducing                                                         from your vessel.
   for high levels of sea
   clutter.                    the color gain may                                                    · SuperHD Controls
                               provide better target                                                   -- for SuperHD
                               detail and detection.                                                   scanners only:


Using radar                                                                                                                                     109
 Tuning method   Related options           Description   Tuning method                Related options      Description

                  ­ Antenna Boost:                       Color palette presets:                            The color palette options
                    scales the effective                                                                   enable you to customize
                                                         · Bold -- uses                                    the look of the radar
                    antenna size. At                       high color gain,
                    zero, the effective                                                                    display for different
                                                           predominately red,                              situations.
                    antenna size                           to show weak targets
                    matches its actual                     more intensely.
                    size. At 95%, the
                    effective antenna                    · Professional 1 --
                    size is doubled.                       high resolution palette
                    Increasing the                         that uses the full color
                    effective antenna                      range to display
                    size separates                         the information
                    targets that appear                    discovered by the
                    merged at lower                        scanner, just the
                    settings.                              strong returns are
                                                           red.
                  ­ Power Boost:
                    adjusts effective                    · Professional 2
                    transmit power.                        -- high resolution
                    At zero, the                           palette, displays
                    radar operates                         weaker targets in
                    at its standard                        browns with more
                    power (4kW or                          intense targets
                    12kW). At 90, the                      displayed in yellows.
                    effective power
                    is increased by a                    · Pathfinder -- similar
                    factor of at least                     to the Pathfinder color
                    two. Increasing                        palette.
                    the power makes                      · Night Vision --
                    targets more                           green.
                    distinct from noise.
                    For maximum
                    benefit, reduce
                    power boost to
                    prevent saturation
                    of strong targets.
110                                                                                                C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Tuning method               Related options            Description                Tuning method   Related options             Description
 Enhance Echoes              INT. REJECTION:            The enhance echoes                           relative to your
 functions:                                             functions enable you to                     vessel. Targets are
                             · ON -- minimizes          minimize the negative                       displayed in yellow,
 · Interference                the effect of            effects of echoes on the                    turning to paler
   rejection -- this           interference from        radar display.                              shades of blue as
   function minimizes          other radar-equipped                                                 the signal diminishes.
   the effect of               vessels.                                                             The options are: 10
   interference from                                                                                sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 5
   other radar-eqipped       · OFF -- allows you to                                                 min, 10 min.
   vessels.                    detect the presence
                               of other radars in the                                              · OFF -- does NOT
 · Expansion --                vicinity.                                                             show the direction
   enables you to                                                                                    and speed of moving
   override the default      EXPANSION:                                                              targets in relation to
   radar pulse length,       · ON -- increases                                                       your vessel.
   providing larger target     the pulse length.
   returns.                                                                        Tune control    · AUTO -- the               The radar tuning control
                               This provides larger                                                  default mode.             enables you to fine-tune
 · Wakes -- enables            target returns, making                                                The radar tunes           the radar scanner's
   you to see the              them easier to see.                                                   itself automatically      receiver for maximum
   direction and speed         However, larger                                                       on all range              target returns on the
   of moving targets           returns may decrease                                                  scales. Raymarine         display.
   relative to your            target resolution, and                                                recommends that
   vessel.                     merge on the display.                                                 you leave the tune
                             · OFF -- this is the                                                    function in AUTO
                               default setting. It                                                   mode to receive the
                               provides better range                                                 maximum signal.
                               resolution, giving                                                  · MANUAL -- enables
                               you more defined                                                      you to manually set
                               (but smaller) target                                                  the tuning. Adjust
                               returns.                                                              the control to obtain
                             WAKES:                                                                  the maximum signal
                                                                                                     strength. If you adjust
                             · ON -- shows the                                                       the setting shortly
                               direction and speed                                                   after powering up
                               of moving targets                                                     the radar scanner,

Using radar                                                                                                                                          111
 Tuning method          Related options            Description       5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
                                                                        appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
                            you should adjust it
                            again approximately                      6. Press the OK button.
                            10 minutes after
                            powering up the                          Adjusting digital radar color gain
                            scanner, as the                          In the radar application:
                            required setting
                            will change after                        1. Press the GAIN softkey.
                            the magnetron has                        2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,
                            warmed up.                                  or OFFSHORE MODE softkey, as appropriate.
                                                                     3. Press the same softkey again.
                                                                        The softkeys change to provide more options.
Selecting digital radar gain presets
                                                                     4. Press the COLOR GAIN softkey repeatedly until the MAN option
In the radar application:                                               is selected.
                                                                     5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
1. Press the GAIN softkey.                                              appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,                  6. Press the OK button.
   or OFFSHORE MODE softkey, as appropriate.
The softkey is highlighted, and the display changes to reflect the   Adjusting digital radar rain clutter
new mode.
                                                                     In the radar application:
                                                                     1. Press the GAIN softkey.
Adjusting digital radar gain presets                                 2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,
Adjusting digital radar preset gain                                     or OFFSHORE MODE softkey, as appropriate.
                                                                     3. Press the same softkey again.
In the radar application:
                                                                        The softkeys change to provide more options.
1. Press the GAIN softkey.
                                                                     4. Press the RAIN softkey repeatedly until the ON option is
2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,                     selected.
   or OFFSHORE MODE softkey, as appropriate.
                                                                     5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
3. Press the same softkey again.                                        appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
   The softkeys change to provide more options.
4. Press the GAIN softkey repeatedly until the MAN option is
   selected.

112                                                                                                          C-Series Widescreen user reference
6. Press the OK button.                                          1. Press the GAIN softkey.
                                                                 2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,
Adjusting digital radar sea gain                                    or OFFSHORE MODE softkey, as appropriate.
In the radar application:                                        3. Press the same softkey again.

1. Press the GAIN softkey.                                          The softkeys change to provide more options.
2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,              4. Press the SUPER HD CONTROLS softkey.
   or OFFSHORE MODE softkey, as appropriate.                     5. Press the POWER BOOST softkey repeatedly until the MAN
3. Press the same softkey again.                                    option is selected.
                                                                 6. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
   The softkeys change to provide more options.                     appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
4. Press the SEA softkey repeatedly until the MAN option is      7. Press the OK button.
   selected.
5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
   appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).                     Selecting a digital radar color palette
6. Press the OK button.
                                                                 In the radar application:
Adjusting SuperHD radar antenna boost
                                                                 1. Press the MENU button.
In the radar application:                                        2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Radar Setup menu item, then
1. Press the GAIN softkey.                                          press the trackpad right to select it.
2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,              3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Colour Palette menu item,
   or OFFSHORE MODE softkey, as appropriate.                        then press the trackpad right to select it.
3. Press the same softkey again.                                 4. Using the trackpad, select the appropriate color palette.
                                                                 5. Press the OK button.
   The softkeys change to provide more options.
4. Press the SUPER HD CONTROLS softkey.
5. Press the ANTENNA BOOST softkey repeatedly until the MAN      Selecting the enhance echoes functions
   option is selected.
6. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the   Enabling radar interference rejection
   appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).                     In the radar application:
7. Press the OK button.
                                                                 1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
Adjusting SuperHD radar power boost                              2. Press the INT. REJECTION softkey repeatedly until the ON
                                                                    option is selected.
In the radar application:
Using radar                                                                                                                       113
3. Press the OK button.                                               9.8 Radar tuning -- ANALOG scanners
Enabling radar expansion                                              You can use the gain presets and other functions to improve the
                                                                      quality of the radar picture.
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.                                   Tuning method         Related Options            Description
2. Press the EXPANSION softkey repeatedly until the ON option
                                                                       Gain                  · AUTO -- the preset       Enables you to adjust
   is selected.
                                                                                               operates in fully        the sensitivity of the
3. Press the OK button.                                                                        automatic mode. This     radar reception. In some
                                                                                               is the default.          situations, adjusting the
Enabling radar wakes                                                                                                    sensitivity may improve
                                                                                             · MAN -- allows you to     the clarity of the radar
In the radar application:                                                                      manually adjust the      picture.
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.                                                           intensity of the gain,
                                                                                               from 0 to 100%.
2. Press the WAKES softkey repeatedly until the ON option is
   selected.
3. Press the OK button.


Adjusting the radar tune control
In the radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Radar Setup menu item, then
   press the trackpad right to select it.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Scanner Setup menu item,
   then press the trackpad right to select it.
4. Using the trackpad, highlight the Tune Adjust menu item, then
   press the trackpad right to select it.
5. Press the TUNE softkey, and select the MANUAL option.
6. Using the rotary control, adjust the level to obtain the maximum
   signal strength (indicated by the eight-step horizontal bar).
7. Press the OK button.


114                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Tuning method   Related Options           Description                   Tuning method   Related Options            Description
 FTC function    · ON -- enables the       Enables you to remove         Rain function   · ON -- enables the        The radar scanner
                   FTC function and        areas of clutter at a                           Rain function and        detects echoes from rain
                   allows you to adjust    distance from your                              allows you to adjust     or snow. These echoes
                   the setting between 0   vessel. It also helps you                       the setting between 0    appear on screen as
                   and 100%.               to distinguish between                          and 100%.                countless small echoes
                                           two very close echoes                                                    continuously changing
                 · OFF -- disables the     on the same bearing,                          · OFF -- disables the      size, intensity and
                   FTC function. This is   which may otherwise                             Rain function. This is   position. Turning the
                   the default.            merge and appear                                the default.             rain clutter function
                                           as one echo. You can                                                     ON suppresses the
                                           adjust the intensity of the                                              bulk effect of rain
                                           FTC function between 0                                                   returns from around
                                           and 100%:                                                                your vessel, making
                                                                                                                    it easier to recognize
                                           · A higher setting                                                       other objects. You can
                                             shows only the                                                         adjust the intensity of
                                             leading edge of large                                                  this setting between 0
                                             (rain clutter) echoes,                                                 and 100%.
                                             while the effect on
                                             smaller (ship) echoes
                                             is only slight.
                                           · A lower setting
                                             reduces background
                                             noise and fill-in
                                             returns from land and
                                             other large targets.




Using radar                                                                                                                               115
 Tuning method               Related Options           Description
 Sea gain presets:           · AUTO -- the preset      Enable you to quickly
                               operates in fully       select pre-configured
 · Harbor -- this is the       automatic mode. This    settings to achieve the
   default mode. This          is the default.         best picture in different
   setting takes account                               situations. Each of the
   of land clutter so that   · MAN -- allows you to    gain presets has a gain
   smaller targets, like       manually adjust the     function, which is set
   navigation buoys, are       intensity of the sea    to fully automatic mode
   not lost.                   gain, from 0 to 100%.   by default. Raymarine
 · Coastal -- accounts                                 strongly recommends
   for the slightly higher                             the use of these presets
   levels of sea clutter                               to achieve optimum
   you might encounter                                 results. However, you
   out of harbor and                                   can adjust this gain
   adjusts the radar                                   manually if required.
   display accordingly.
 · Offshore --
   Automatically adjusts
   for high levels of sea
   clutter.




116                                                                                C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Tuning method               Related Options            Description                Tuning method   Related Options           Description
 Enhance Echoes              INT. REJECTION:            The enhance echoes                         WAKES:
 functions:                                             functions enable you to
                             · ON -- minimizes          minimize the negative                      · ON -- you can see
 · Interference                the effect of            effects of echoes on the                     the direction and
   rejection -- this           interference from        radar display.                               speed of moving
   function minimizes          other radar-equipped                                                  targets relative to
   the effect of               vessels. There                                                        your vessel. Targets
   interference from           are two settings --                                                   are displayed in
   other radar-eqipped         NORMAL, and HIGH.                                                     yellow, turning to
   vessels.                                                                                          paler shades of
                             · OFF -- allows you to
 · Expansion --                detect the presence                                                   blue as the signal
   enables you to              of other radars in the                                                diminishes. The
   override the default        vicinity.                                                             options are: 10 sec,
   radar pulse length,                                                                               30 sec, 1 min, 5 min,
   providing larger target   EXPANSION:                                                              10 min.
   returns.                  · ON -- increases the                                                 · OFF -- you will NOT
 · Wakes -- enables            pulse length, giving                                                  be able to see the
   you to see the              larger target returns                                                 direction and speed
   direction and speed         that are easier to                                                    of moving targets
   of moving targets           see. However, larger                                                  in relation to your
   relative to your            returns may decrease                                                  vessel.
   vessel.                     target resolution,
                               and merge on the                                    Tune control    · AUTO -- the             The radar tuning control
                               display. There are                                                    default mode.           enables you to fine-tune
                               two settings -- LOW                                                   The radar tunes         the radar scanner's
                               and HIGH.                                                             itself automatically    receiver for maximum
                                                                                                     on all range            target returns on the
                             · OFF -- this is the                                                    scales. Raymarine       display.
                               default setting. It                                                   recommends that
                               provides better range                                                 you leave the tune
                               resolution,giving                                                     function in AUTO
                               you more defined                                                      mode to receive the
                               (but smaller) target                                                  maximum signal.
                               returns.
                                                                                                   · MANUAL -- enables
                                                                                                     you to manually set
Using radar                                                                                                                                        117
 Tuning method          Related Options            Description   2. Press the FTC softkey repeatedly until the ON option is selected.
                         the tuning. Adjust                      3. Using the rotary controller, adjust the FTC function to the
                         the control to obtain                      appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
                         the maximum signal                      4. Press the OK button.
                         strength. If you adjust
                         the setting shortly
                         after powering up                       Adjusting analog radar rain function
                         the radar scanner,
                         you should adjust it                    In the radar application:
                         again approximately
                         10 minutes after                        1. Press the GAIN softkey.
                         powering up the                         2. Press the RAIN softkey repeatedly until the ON option is
                         scanner, as the                            selected.
                         required setting                        3. Using the rotary controller, adjust the Rain function to the
                         will change after                          appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
                         the magnetron has                       4. Press the OK button.
                         warmed up.

                                                                 Adjusting analog radar sea gain
Adjusting analog radar gain
                                                                 In the radar application:
In the radar application:
                                                                 1. Press the GAIN softkey.
1. Press the GAIN softkey.                                       2. Press the SEA GAIN softkey repeatedly until the MAN option
2. Press the GAIN softkey repeatedly until the MAN option is        is selected.
   selected.                                                     3. Using the rotary controller, adjust the Sea Gain to the appropriate
3. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the      setting (between 0 and 100%).
   appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).                     4. Press the OK button.
4. Press the OK button.

                                                                 Selecting the enhance echoes functions
Adjusting analog radar FTC function
In the radar application:                                        Enabling radar interference rejection
1. Press the GAIN softkey.                                       In the radar application:

118                                                                                                      C-Series Widescreen user reference
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.                               4. Using the trackpad, highlight the Tune Adjust menu item, then
2. Press the INT. REJECTION softkey repeatedly until the ON           press the trackpad right to select it.
   option is selected.                                             5. Press the TUNE softkey, and select the MANUAL option.
3. Press the OK button.                                            6. Using the rotary control, adjust the level to obtain the maximum
                                                                      signal strength (indicated by the eight-step horizontal bar).
                                                                   7. Press the OK button.
Enabling radar expansion
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the EXPANSION softkey repeatedly until the ON option
   is selected.
3. Press the OK button.


Enabling radar wakes
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the WAKES softkey repeatedly until the ON option is
   selected.
3. Press the OK button.


Adjusting the radar tune control
In the radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Radar Setup menu item, then
   press the trackpad right to select it.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Scanner Setup menu item,
   then press the trackpad right to select it.


Using radar                                                                                                                         119
9.9 Waypoints                                                          3. Press the ON RADAR softkey repeatedly until the HIDE option
                                                                          is selected.
                                                                       4. Press the OK button.
Placing a waypoint at the cursor position
1. Press the WPTS MOB button.                                          Displaying the waypoint list
2. Move the cursor to the position on the chart where you want
   the waypoint.                                                       1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
3. Press the WAYPOINT AT CURSOR softkey.                               2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
4. Press OK or wait 4 seconds.


Placing a waypoint at your vessel's position
1.    Press the WPTS MOB button.
2.    Press the WAYPOINT AT VESSEL softkey.
3.    Press OK or wait 4 seconds.
4.    Alternatively, press the WPTS MOB button twice, and then press
      OK.


Placing a waypoint at a known position
1.    Press the WPTS MOB button.
2.    Press the WAYPOINT AT LAT/LON softkey.
3.    Enter the Latitude/Longitude position..
4.    Press OK twice.


Hiding a waypoint on the radar display
In the radar application:
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.

120                                                                                                        C-Series Widescreen user reference
9.10 Using radar to measure distances,                                e.g.

ranges, and bearings
When you are using the radar application, you can measure
distances, ranges and bearings in a variety of ways.
These options are detailed in the table below:
                                                                      Range -1/4 nm               Range - 3/4 nm              Range - 11/ nm
                                                                                                                                         2




                                                                                                                                                           D8407_1
                                                                      Range rings -1/8 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart
                  Distances
                  Between         Range From                         Measuring using the cursor
 Functions        Points          Your Vessel     Bearings
                                                                     To measure the bearing and range from your boat to a specified
 Range Rings      Yes             Yes             No                 target, move the cursor to the appropriate position on the screen.
                  (approximate    (approximate
                  distance)       range)                             Bearing and range from
                                                                     your vessel to cursor
 Cursor           No              Yes             Yes
                                                                                     Cursor
 Variable Range   No              Yes             No
 Markers (VRMs)
 Electronic       No              No              Yes
 Bearing Lines
 (EBLs)




                                                                                                                                                           D8402_1
 Floating VRMs    Yes             No              No
 Floating EBLs    No              No              Yes
                                                                      Note: If cursor position is not shown in the Databar, go to Menu
                                                                      > Databar Setup > Configure.
Measuring using the range rings
Use the range rings to gauge the approximate distances between       Measuring using Variable Range Markers (VRMs)
points. Range rings are concentric circles displayed on the screen
and centred from your boat at pre-set distances. The number and      A Variable Range Marker (VRM) is a circle centred on your vessel's
spacing of the rings changes as you range in and out.                position and fixed with respect to the heading mode. When this
                                                                     circle is adjusted to align with a target, its range from your boat is
                                                                     measured and displayed on the ADJUST VRM softkey. The data is
                                                                     also displayed if you select the VRM with the cursor.


Using radar                                                                                                                                               121
                  VRM                                                                         EBL




                                                                                                          D8425_1
                                      D8408_1




                                                                       Note: The default bearing mode for EBLs is relative to your
                                                                       vessel's heading. If heading data is available, you can set the
Measuring using Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs)                        bearing mode to be relative (REL), magnetic/true (M/T). When
An Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) is a line drawn from your boat to     M/T is selected, the EBL bearings will be expressed as either
the edge of the window. When this line is rotated to align with a      true or magnetic, dependant on the equipment connected. The
target, its bearing relative to your boat's heading is measured and    current EBL bearing is shown on both the radar screen EBL label
displayed on the ADJUST EBL softkey. The data is also displayed if     and on the ADJUST EBL softkey.
you select the EBL with the cursor.
                                                                      Measuring using combined VRM and EBL
                                                                      A VRM and an EBL can be combined to measure both the range
                                                                      and the bearing of the specified target.




122                                                                                                                 C-Series Widescreen user reference
                                                                       7. Repeat Steps 1 to 6 to create a second VRM/EBL if required,
                 VRM    Target EBL                                        this time using the VRM/EBL 2 softkey.

                                                                        Note: The first VRM/EBL will be placed at a location of 1/3 of
                                                                        the current range and 030° relative to your vessel's head. If this
                                                                        setting is adjusted, the display will retain the adjustments and use
                                                                        them when the VRM/EBL is next enabled.



                                                                       Creating a floating VRM or EBL on the radar
                                                                       display
                                                                       1. If you have already created a VRM or EBL, skip to Step 7.
                                                                           Otherwise, in the Radar application, press the VRM/EBL 1

                                      D8403_1
                                                                           softkey until the ON option is selected.
                                                                       2. Press the ADJUST VRM softkey.
Measuring using floating VRM and EBL                                   3. Using the rotary control, adjust the VRM to the required size.
You can use the VRM/EBL float function to measure the range and        4. Press the ADJUST EBL softkey.
bearing between any two points on the radar screen. This function      5. Using the rotary control, adjust the EBL to the required angle.
allows you to move the VRM/EBL centre away from your boat's            6. Press the OK button to save the settings.
position and onto a target. You can then change the radius of the      7. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over the VRM or EBL.
VRM to determine the distance between two points and change the        8. Press the FLOATING EBL softkey.
angle of the EBL, relative to its new origin, to obtain the bearing.
                                                                       9. Press the ADJUST FLOAT softkey.
                                                                       10. Using the trackpad, move the float to define the first point for
Creating a VRM or EBL on the radar display                                 your measurement.
                                                                       11. Press the OK button twice.
1. In the Radar application, press the VRM/EBL 1 softkey until the     12. Press the ADJUST VRM softkey
   ON option is selected.                                              13. Using the trackpad, move the VRM over the second target.
2. Press the ADJUST VRM softkey.                                       14. The ADJUST VRM softkey tells you what the measurement is
3. Using the rotary control, adjust the VRM to the required size.          between the two targets.
4. Press the ADJUST EBL softkey.                                       15. Press the OK button.
5. Using the rotary control, adjust the EBL to the required angle.
6. Press the OK button to save the settings.

Using radar                                                                                                                               123
 Note: When creating the first VRM/EBL, it will be placed at a                                 9.11 Using radar to track targets and
 location of 1/3 of the current range and 030° relative to your                                avoid collisions
 boat's head. If this setting is adjusted, the display will retain the
 adjustments and use them when the VRM/EBL is next enabled.
                                                                                               There are a number of radar functions to help you track targets and
                                                                                               avoid collisions, including Guard Zones, MARPA, and AIS.
Unfloating a VRM or EBL on the radar display
                                                                                               With a radar connected to your multifunction display, you can:
1.      In the Radar application, press the VRM/EBL softkey.
                                                                                               · Assess how far away a target is and its bearing (VRMs/EBLs).
2.      Press the FLOATING softkey (VRM/EBL must be switched ON).
3.      Press the CENTER softkey.                                                              · Set an alarm to trigger when a target is within a specified zone
                                                                                                 (Guard Zones).
4.      Press the OK button.
                                                                                               · Display detailed information on tracked targets (MARPA).

Using the radar range rings                                                                    · Display the identity of other vessels and if broadcasted, their
                                                                                                 voyage information (AIS).
Radar range rings enable you to measure the distance between                                   · Display the range and bearing of a target.
two points on the radar display.
Use the range rings to gauge the approximate distances between
points. Range rings are concentric circles displayed on the screen                             Setting up a radar guard zone
and centred from your boat at pre-set distances. The number and
spacing of the rings changes as you range in and out.                                          1. In the Radar application, press the TARGET TRACKING softkey.
                                                                                               2. Press the MONITOR IN ZONES softkey.
 e.g.
                                                                                               3. Press the ZONE 1 or ZONE 2 softkey (as appropriate) until the
                                                                                                  ON or OFF option is selected.
                                                                                               4. Press the SET UP ZONE 1 or SET UP ZONE 2 softkey, as
                                                                                                  appropriate.
                                                                                               5. Press the ZONE SHAPE softkey until the SECTOR or CIRCLE
                                                                                                  option is selected, as required.
 Range -1/4 nm               Range - 3/4 nm              Range - 11/ nm
                                                                    2
                                                                                     D8407_1




 Range rings -1/8 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart             6. Press the SET INNER softkey until it is highlighted.
                                                                                               7. Using the rotary control, set the inner limit for the guard zone,
Enabling and disabling radar range rings                                                          as appropriate.

1. In the radar application, press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the RANGE RINGS softkey until the ON or OFF option
   is selected, as required.

124                                                                                                                                    C-Series Widescreen user reference
8. Press the OK button.                                              the better MARPA will perform. MARPA will function without SOG
                                                                     and COG in relative mode. For the best heading data a Raymarine
                                                                     SMART heading sensor or a gyro-stabilized autopilot is required.
Enabling and disabling radar warning alarms
                                                                     Safety notices
1. Press the MENU button.                                            MARPA can improve collision avoidance when used wisely. It is the
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Alarm Setup menu item and       User's responsibility to exercise common prudence and navigational
   press the trackpad right to select it.                            judgements.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Radar Alarms Setup menu item    There are conditions where acquiring a target may become difficult.
   and press the trackpad right to select it.                        These same conditions may be a factor in successfully tracking a
                                                                     target. Some of the conditions are:
MARPA overview                                                       · The target echo is weak. The target is very close to land, buoys
                                                                       or other large targets.
MARPA is used for target tracking and risk analysis in the radar
application.                                                         · The target or your own ship is making rapid manoeuvres.

You can use the Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA)            · Choppy sea state conditions exist and the target is buried in
functions for target tracking and risk analysis. MARPA improves        excessive sea clutter or in deep swells.
collision avoidance by obtaining detailed information for            · Choppy sea state conditions exist yielding poor stability; own
automatically tracked targets, and provides continuous, accurate,      boat's heading data is very unstable.
and rapid situation evaluation. The number of targets that you can
track at any one time is dependent on the model of radar scanner     · Inadequate heading data.
that you are using.
                                                                     Symptoms of such conditions are that acquisition is difficult and the
MARPA automatically tracks acquired targets, calculates target       MARPA vectors are unstable; the symbol wanders away from the
bearing and range, speed and course, Closest Point of Approach       target, locks on to another target or changes to a lost symbol target.
(CPA), and Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA).
                                                                     If any of these conditions are present, acquisition and tracking may
Each target tracked can be displayed with a CPA graphic which        need to be re-initiated or, in some cases be impossible to maintain.
shows the target vessel, course and speed (as a vector) and          Improving the quality of the heading data will reduce the effect of
indicates the CPA. The calculated target data can also be shown      the other conditions.
on your screen. Each target is continually assessed and an audible
alarm is sounded if a target becomes dangerous, or is lost.          How a MARPA risk is assessed
Effective MARPA operation is dependant on accurate own-ship's        Each target is monitored to see if it will be within a certain distance
heading and speed. Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over           from your boat within a certain time. If so, the target is designated
Ground (COG) information are required to show true target course     as dangerous and an audible warning is sounded along with an
and speed. The better the quality of the heading and speed data,     on-screen warning being shown. The target symbol changes to

Using radar                                                                                                                               125
the dangerous target symbol and flashes to indicate that it is a
dangerous target. Pressing the appropriate soft key will silence the
alarm and remove the warning.
If a target is lost, either because the MARPA software has lost
contact with it, or because it has moved out of range, an audible                     Vector
alarm is sounded and an on-screen warning appears. The                                CPA graphic
on-screen symbol will change to the target lost symbol. Pressing the
appropriate soft key will silence the alarm and remove the on-screen
warning and the target lost symbol.                                                                                3      9


Effective range for MARPA targets




                                                                                                                                                       D9008_1
MARPA target acquisition is only available at radar range scales of
up to 12nm, although tracking continues at all ranges.
If you change to a smaller range scale, targets may be beyond the            True mode
range of your scanner and will be lost. In such cases, an on-screen          With the display set in True mode, the vectors of your vessel and
warning will indicate that the target is off-screen.                         the target are shown extended to their intersection point. The
                                                                             CPA is shown as a line that is placed on your vessel's vector at
Status symbols for MARPA targets                                             the point of the CPA. The length and direction of the line indicates
Each target is shown in the radar display as a symbol, which                 the distance and bearing of the target at CPA. The text indicates
indicates its status:                                                        CPA and TCPA. The text next to the target symbol indicates its true
                                                                             course and speed.
             Target being acquired         Dangerous target
                                                                             Relative mode
                                                                             With the display set in Relative mode, no vector extension of your
                                                                   D7542_2
             Safe target                   Lost target
                                                                             vessel is shown. The CPA line emerges from your own vessel, with
                                                                             the target vector extension being shown as relative, not true. The
                                                                             text next to the target indicates its course and speed.
Vessel vectors (CPA graphics) overview
CPA graphics show vectors for your vessel and a selected target.             Setting up MARPA
A vector is a line on-screen showing the predicted courses of your           In the radar application:
vessel and the selected target if you both remain on your present
course. These vectors vary in length due to vessel speed and vector          1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey.
length set in the MARPA Setup menu.                                          2. Press the MARPA AND AIS OPTIONS softkey.



126                                                                                                                    C-Series Widescreen user reference
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the required option, then press the   Parameter              Descriptions                 Options
   trackpad right to select it.
                                                                       Target History         Plots a target's previous    · OFF
Displaying vessel vectors (CPA graphics)                                                      position at specified
                                                                                              intervals. The four          · 0.5 min
1. Position the cursor over the target.                                                       most recent position         · 1 min
2. To display the CPA graphic for the target, press the CPA                                   points are displayed.
   GRAPHIC softkey until the ON option is selected.                                           If True target vectors       · 3 min
3. To hide the CPA graphic for the target, press the CPA GRAPHIC                              are selected, the four       · 6 min
   softkey until the OFF option is selected.                                                  most recent vessel
4. To display the CPA graphic automatically when you place the                                position points are also
   cursor over any part of the MARPA symbol, select the AUTO                                  displayed.
   option.                                                             Own Vessel Safe Zone   The safe zone is a ring,     · 0.1 nm
5. Press the OK button.                                                                       centred on your boat,
                                                                                              within which a target is     · 0.2 nm
MARPA options                                                                                 considered dangerous         · 0.5 nm
The MARPA options are accessible by pressing the TARGET                                       if it will enter this zone
                                                                                              within the Time to Safe      · 1.0 nm
TRACKING > MARPA & AIS OPTIONS softkeys.
                                                                                              Zone period (see below).     · 2.0 nm
 Parameter              Descriptions            Options
                                                                       Time to Safe Zone      If a target enters your      · 3 min
 Vector Length          The time period         · 0.5 min                                     safe zone within this time
                                                                                              period, it is considered     · 6 min
                        specified for drawing
                        length of vectors.      · 1 min                                       dangerous.                   · 12 min
                                                · 3 min
                                                                                                                           · 24 min
                                                · 6 min
                                                                       Safe Zone Ring         Controls whether the         · Visible
                                                · 12 min                                      safe zone ring is
                                                                                              displayed or hidden          · Hidden
                                                · 30 min                                      on screen.
                                                · 60 min




Using radar                                                                                                                            127
                                                                       9.12 Radar alarms
Using MARPA                                                            The radar application raises a variety of alarms to warn you of
                                                                       potential dangers.
Acquiring a MARPA target to track
                                                                       If switched on, the following alarms will be triggered when you are
In the radar application:                                              in the radar application:
1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey.                                  · System alarms - anchor, timer, alarm clock and temperature.
2. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the target to be           · Navigation alarms - arrival and off track.
   acquired.
3. Press the ACQUIRE TARGET softkey.                                   · Radar alarms - guard zones.
The "target being acquired" symbol is displayed. If the target is      · Fishfinder alarms.
present for several scans, the radar locks-on to the target, and the
symbol changes to "safe target" status.                                · AIS alarms.
                                                                       · Depth alarms.
Enabling radar wakes
                                                                       · Data alarms.
In the radar application:
                                                                       · External SeaTalk alarms.
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
                                                                       When an alarm is triggered, a buzzer sounds and a pop-up window
2. Press the WAKES softkey repeatedly until the ON option is           describing the alarm and how to clear it is displayed.
   selected.
3. Press the OK button.

Cancelling a MARPA target
                                                                       Selecting the radar alarms setup menu
In the radar application:                                              1.   Press the MENU button.
                                                                       2.   Using the trackpad, highlight the Alarm Setup menu item.
1. Move the cursor over the relevant target.                           3.   Press right on the trackpad to enter the Alarm Setup menu.
2. Press the CANCEL TARGET softkey.                                    4.   Using the trackpad, highlight the Radar Alarms Setup menu item.
3. Alternatively, display the MARPA target list by pressing the        5.   Press right on the trackpad to enter the Radar Alarms Setup
   TARGET TRACKING, then MARPA LIST softkeys.                               menu.
4. Using the trackpad, select the relevant MARPA target from the
   list.
5. Press the CANCEL TARGET softkey.                                    Enabling and disabling radar warning alarms
                                                                       1. Press the MENU button.

128                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the Alarm Setup menu item and      9.13 Setting up your radar
   press the trackpad right to select it.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Radar Alarms Setup menu item   The set up for your radar can be changed from the standard
   and press the trackpad right to select it.                       configuration to suit your particular needs.
                                                                    Although you will probably only do this when you first use the radar,
                                                                    you may decide to make subsequent adjustments once you become
                                                                    more familiar with the system. Any settings that you change are
                                                                    retained and become the default settings, even when you power off
                                                                    your multifunction display.


                                                                    Radar setup menu options
                                                                    The Radar Setup menu enables you to configure the performance
                                                                    and behaviour of your radar scanner.

                                                                     Function        Description                                Options
                                                                     Select          Select the radar scanner that is           None.
                                                                     Scanner         connected to your multifunction
                                                                                     display. Only one radar scanner may
                                                                                     be connected at any one time.
                                                                     Scanner Setup   This menu item contains a sub-menu         Dual Range
                                                                                     that enables you to adjust the settings
                                                                                     for the following functions:               · ON

                                                                                     · Dual Range (Digital only) -- when        · OFF
                                                                                       set to ON, this allows you to view two   Tune Adjust
                                                                                       ranges simultaneously in separate
                                                                                       windows. Short range provides            · AUTO
                                                                                       a maximum range of 3 nautical
                                                                                                                                · MANUAL
                                                                                       miles; long range provides standard
                                                                                       values. Long range cannot be set to      Sea Clutter Curve
                                                                                       a value that is less than short range.




Using radar                                                                                                                                    129
       Note: The Dual Range                       · ADJUST                          · Parking Offset (Digital only) -- this
       function is not available when               CURVE (1 to                       setting is only available when the
       there are active MARPA                       8)                                radar is set to Off or Standby. The
       targets.                                                                       parking offset determines how the
                                                  Parking Offset                      scanner is aligned to the pedestal.
                                                                                      The default setting is 0 degrees,
       Note: Chart Sync and Chart                 · 0 to 358                          with the scanner aligning to the
       Overlay are temporarily                      degrees, in                       pedastal, facing forwards.
       disabled in the radar                        two-degree
       application when the Dual                    increments.                     · Antenna Size -- this is used to
       Range function is ON.                                                          specify the size of your radar
                                                  Antenna Size                        scanner.
      · Tune Adjust -- allows you to fine         · Radome
        tune the radar scanner's receiver
        for maximum returns on the display.       · 4' Array       Color Palette    The color palette options enable you to   · Bold
        Raymarine recommends that this                             (Digital only)   customize the look of the radar display
                                                  · 6' Array                        for different situations, as follows:     · Professional 1
        function is set to AUTO. If you set
        this function to MANUAL and adjust                                                                                    · Professional 2
                                                                                    · Bold -- uses high color gain,
        the setting shortly after powering up                                         predominately red, to show weak         · Pathfinder
        the radar scanner, you should adjust                                          targets more intensely.
        it again approximately 10 minutes                                                                                     · Night Vision
        after powering up the scanner, as                                           · Professional 1 -- high resolution
        the required setting will change after                                        palette that uses the full color
        the magnetron has warmed up.                                                  range to display the information
                                                                                      discovered by the scanner, just the
      · Sea Clutter Curve -- radar echoes                                             strong returns are red.
        from waves can make it difficult to
        detect real targets. These echoes                                           · Professional 2 -- high resolution
        are known as "sea clutter". Several                                           palette, displays weaker targets in
        factors can affect the level of clutter                                       browns with more intense targets
        you see, including the weather and                                            displayed in yellows.
        sea conditions, and the mounting
                                                                                    · Pathfinder -- similar to the
        height of the radar. The sea clutter
                                                                                      Pathfinder color palette.
        curve setting adjusts the radar's
        sensitivity to sea clutter. The                                             · Night Vision -- green.
        steepest setting for the curve is 1,
        and the most shallow setting is 8.                         EBL              The measurement point used for            · Mag/True
                                                                                    reference when measuring distances

130                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Reference    using Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs)
              and range rings in the chart application.   · Relative
              The options are Magnetic/True North,
              or Relative.


 Timed        Controls the radar's timed transmission     · On
 Transmit     power-save mode.
                                                          · Off
 Transmit     When ON, the scanner performs the           · 10 SCANS
 Period       number of scans specified and then
              shuts down for the number of minutes        · 20 SCANS
              specified by the Standby Period.            · 30 SCANS
 Standby      Indicates the number of minutes that        · 3 MINS
 Period       the system shuts down - the scanner
              does not rotate and the display is in       · 5 MINS
              standby mode.                               · 10 MINS
                                                          · 15 MINS
 Bearing      Enables you to make corrections for         Refer to
 Alignment    display azimuth error.                      Installation Guide
 Radar        Advanced setup options.                     Refer to
 Advanced                                                 Installation Guide
 Setup




Using radar                                                                    131
132   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 10: Using AIS

Chapter contents
·    10.1 AIS overview on page 134
·    10.2 AIS prerequisites on page 135
·    10.3 Classes of AIS data on page 136
·    10.4 Enabling or disabling AIS on page 137
·    10.5 Displaying AIS vectors on page 137
·    10.6 AIS status symbols on page 138
·    10.7 AIS silent mode on page 138
·    10.8 Viewing AIS target information on page 139
·    10.9 Using AIS to avoid collisions on page 140
·    10.10 AIS options on page 141
·    10.11 AIS alarms on page 142
·    10.12 Buddy tracking on page 142




Using AIS                                              133
10.1 AIS overview                                                                                     The AIS system displays other AIS equipped vessels in the
                                                                                                      surrounding area as triangular targets overlaid on a chart or radar
The AIS feature enables you to receive certain information                                            window. Up to 100 targets are displayed. As the vessel's status
broadcast by other vessels, and add them as a target in the Chart                                     changes, the symbol for the target will change accordingly.
and Radar applications.                                                                               Vectors can be displayed for each target. These vectors indicate
With an optonal AIS receiver connected to your multifunction                                          the direction of travel and rate of turn of the vessel and the distance
display, you can:                                                                                     it will travel over a specified period of time (COG/SOG vector).
                                                                                                      Targets displayed with their vectors are referred to as `active targets'
· Display targets for any other AIS-equipped vessels.                                                 and are scaled according to the size of the vessel. The larger the
· Display voyage information being broadcasted by these targets,                                      vessel, the larger the target. You can either display all targets or
  such as their position, course, speed and rate of turn.                                             just dangerous targets.

· Display basic or detailed information for each target vessel,                                       How AIS Works
  including safety critical target data.                                                              AIS uses digital radio signals to broadcast `real-time' information
· Set up a safe zone around your boat.                                                                between vessels and shore based stations via dedicated VHF
                                                                                                      frequencies. This information is used to identify and track vessels in
· View AIS alarm and safety related messages.                                                         the surrounding area and to provide fast, automatic and accurate
                                                                                                      collision avoidance data. AIS will augment your radar application,
This information is displayed in the form of an overlay and additional
                                                                                                      as it can operate in radar blind spots and can detect smaller AIS
data is displayed in a dialog box on your chart screen, for example:
                                                                                                      fitted vessels.
  Heading
                                                                                                       Note: Smaller vessels do not have to be fitted with AIS and whilst
  Large
  vessel                                                                                               it is mandatory for larger commercial vessels to carry AIS, its use
  Direction                                                                                            is not. Therefore, you should not assume that your multifunction
  of turn                                                                                              display will display ALL vessels in your area. Due prudence
  Small                                                                                                and judgement should be exercised. AIS should be used to
  vessel                                                                                               complement radar, not substitute it.

                      097° T                                                                          AIS Simulator Mode
                      1 1. 6 k t
                     1. 2 3 7 n m                                                                     Raymarine recommends that you use the simulator to familiarize
                  0 0 h 0 4 m3 3 s
                                                                                                      yourself with the AIS function. When the system simulator is
  Sleeping                                                                                            switched on (Menu > System Setup > Simulator), it displays 20
  target
                                                                                                      AIS targets within a 25nm range. These targets are displayed using
                       Safety          COG/SOG   Safe zone (defined by   Dangerous                    the appropriate AIS targets status symbol, and move around the
                                                                                            D9056_1




                       critical data   vector    distance or time)       target (flashes)
                                                                                                      screen as if they were real targets.


134                                                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Note: Incoming safety messages cannot be displayed while the   10.2 AIS prerequisites
 simulator is switched on.
                                                                You must have suitable AIS hardware connected to your
                                                                multifunction display to make use of the AIS functionality.
                                                                In order to run AIS, you will need:
                                                                · A receive-only unit or a full transceiver (a unit that sends and
                                                                  receives).
                                                                · A VHF antenna - this is usually supplied with the AIS system.
                                                                · A GPS - to provide position data.
                                                                · A Compass - although not essential, will improve speed
                                                                  calculations.

                                                                 Note: A receiver will allow you to receive data about other
                                                                 vessels in your area but will not allow other vessels to `see' you.
                                                                 A full transceiver transmits and receives AIS data, and therefore
                                                                 allows you to receive data about other vessels. It also enables
                                                                 other AIS-equipped vessels to see and receive information about
                                                                 your vessel. This could include position, course, speed and rate
                                                                 of turn data.


                                                                When the AIS unit is connected to your multifunction display, the
                                                                status of the unit is indicated by an AIS icon in the transducer data
                                                                box.
                                                                You will now need to specify the 38,400 baud setting (Menu >
                                                                System Setup > System Integration > NMEA Port Setting) for the
                                                                NMEA port that communicates with the AIS transceiver or receiver.




Using AIS                                                                                                                            135
10.3 Classes of AIS data                                                                  Class A     Class B            Class B
                                                                        Data              (receive)   (send)             (receive)
There are two classes of AIS data; each class supports a different
range of AIS data.                                                      Draft             Y           N                  N
AIS data is defined as Class A or Class B. The sending and              Cargo             Y           Y                  Y
receiving of Class A data is compulsory for larger vessels. You will    Information
therefore be able to view all larger vessels on your AIS display.
Class B data is applicable to smaller vessels and is not compulsory.    Destination       Y           N                  N
You should not therefore assume that your AIS is displaying all         ETA               Y           N                  N
smaller vessels in your area.
                                                                        Time              Y           Y                  Y
 Note: Not all AIS receivers will decode all information and not
 all of the Class A vessels input all of the required AIS data. For     Ship's position   Y           Y                  Y
 example, some inexpensive AIS Class B receivers do not decode          COG               Y           Y                  Y
 and output information such as the ship's name, IMO number and
 vessel draft/beam/length, destination and so on.                       SOG               Y           Y                  Y

Your AIS receiver or transceiver may support additional AIS data        Gyro heading      Y           Y                  Y
that is not decoded by the multifunction display.
                                                                        Rate of turn      Y           N                  N
The following table lists the AIS information that is decoded by your
multifunction display. (Y = Yes; N = No):                               Navigational      Y           N                  N
                                                                        status
                    Class A         Class B          Class B            Safety message    Y           N                  Y
 Data               (receive)       (send)           (receive)
 Ship's name        Y               Y                Y
 Type               Y               Y                Y
 Call sign          Y               Y                Y

 IMO number         Y               N                N
 Length and beam    Y               Y                Y
 Antenna location   Y               Y                Y



136                                                                                                       C-Series Widescreen user reference
10.4 Enabling or disabling AIS                                          10.5 Displaying AIS vectors
1. To      enable AIS in the chart application:                         You must have the correct data available before AIS vectors can
   i.      Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                              be displayed.
   ii.     Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.                              A target is defined as active when it has the following data displayed
   iii.    Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.                              graphically:
   iv.     Press the AIS OBJECTS softkey repeatedly until the ON
           option is selected.                                          · A COG/SOG vector indicating the predicted distance that a target
                                                                          will travel within a given period of time.
   v.      Press the OK button.
2. To      enable AIS in the radar application:                         · A heading and direction of turn indicator.
   i.      Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
   ii.     Press the AIS LAYER softkey repeatedly until the ON option
           is selected.                                                 Enabling and disabling AIS vectors
    iii.   Press the OK button.                                         In the chart or radar application:
                                                                        1. Move the cursor over the relevant AIS target.
                                                                        2. Press the AIS VECTOR softkey until the ON or OFF option is
                                                                           selected, as appropriate.
                                                                        3. Press the OK button.

                                                                         Note: The same target vector and safe zone settings apply to
                                                                         both radar MARPA and AIS targets.




Using AIS                                                                                                                                 137
10.6 AIS status symbols                                                     10.7 AIS silent mode
The various AIS status modes are represented on your multifunction          AIS silent mode enables you to disable AIS transmissions
display by symbols.                                                         AIS silent mode enables you to disable the transmitting functions
The status of the various AIS-related functions is indicated by a           of your AIS equipment. This is useful when you do not want to
symbol displayed in the databar of your multifunction display.              transmit your vessel's AIS data to other AIS receivers, but still wish
                                                                            to receive data from other vessels.
If your own vessel's position is lost, the multifunction display will
disable the AIS functionality and show the appropriate AIS indicator,        Note: Not all AIS equipment supports silent mode. For more
as shown in the following table:                                             information, refer to the documentation that accompanies your
                                                                             AIS unit.
 Symbol                    Description
                           AIS unit is switched on and operating.
                                                                            Enabling and disabling AIS silent mode
                           AIS currently unavailable.                       In the chart or radar application:
                                                                            1. Press the MENU button.
                           AIS unit is switched off, or not connected.      2. Using the trackpad, highlight the AIS Layer Setup menu item,
                                                                               then press the trackpad right to select it.
                                                                            3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Silent Mode option, then press
                           AIS unit is connected and switched on, but has      the trackpad right to select it.
                           active alarms.
                                                                            4. Using the trackpad, select the ON option to enable silent mode,
                           AIS unit is connected and switched on, but the      or OFF to disable it.
                           dangerous and lost alarm is disabled.




138                                                                                                                 C-Series Widescreen user reference
10.8 Viewing AIS target information                                         Target type             Description                  Symbol

You can display information relating to individual AIS targets.             Dangerous target        Targets within specified
                                                                                                    distance (CPA) or time
When a target is highlighted with the cursor, the softkeys change                                   (TCPA). Dangerous
to allow you to select the following options:                                                       target alarm sounds if
· AIS vectors.                                                                                      enabled. Target flashes.

· AIS safety critical data.                                                 Uncertain target        Calculated CPA/TCPA
                                                                                                    value uncertain.
· AIS list.
                                                                            Lost target             When signal of
· Full AIS data.
                                                                                                    dangerous target not
                                                                                                    received for 20 seconds.
                                                                                                    Target in latest predicted
AIS target symbols                                                                                  position. Alarms sounds
                                                                                                    if enabled. Target
Your multifunction display shows a range of symbols to represent                                    flashes.
the different types of AIS target.
                                                                            Buddy target            Target has previously
 Target type             Description                Symbol                                          been added to the Buddy
                                                                                                    List.
 Transmitting target     Target not activated,
                         dangerous or lost.
                         Target is moving or at
                         anchor.                                           Displaying detailed AIS target information
 Activated target        Target activated --        COG/SOG    Direction   In the chart or radar application:
                         that is, AIS vector        vector     of turn

                         displayed. Vector                                 1. If the chart page is displayed, press the AIS OPTIONS softkey
                         line (optional) shows                 Heading        (or RADAR AND AIS softkey if Radar Overlay is ON).
                         predicted distance                                2. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey.
                         travelled within a given                          3. Press the AIS LIST softkey.
                         time.                                             4. Press the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey.
 Selected target         Target selected with
                         cursor. Can activate the                           Note: You can also display full AIS information by moving the
                         target and view detailed                           cursor over the relevant target in the chart or radar pages, and
                         data.                           AIS                pressing the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey.

Using AIS                                                                                                                                      139
10.9 Using AIS to avoid collisions                                    · Place a waypoint on your chart/radar to mark the sending vessel's
                                                                        position.
You can use the AIS safe zone and safety message functions to
                                                                      · Select to GOTO the sending vessel's position.
avoid collisions with other vessels and objects.
                                                                       Note: You will not receive any safety messages in Simulator
Safe Zones
                                                                       mode (Menu > System Setup > Simulator).
A safe zone is a ring centred on your boat within which a target is
considered dangerous. It is displayed on radar or chart windows
as a red ring.
                                                                      Displaying safety-critical AIS information
This AIS safe zone uses the same criteria as MARPA and will deem
a target dangerous if it comes within a specified distance of your    In the chart or radar application:
vessel (closest point of approach or CPA) within a specified time
(time to closest point of approach or TCPA). The CPA and TCPA are     1. Move the cursor over the relevant AIS target.
calculated using COG/SOG and position from the AIS target.            2. Press the AIS DATA softkey until the ON option is highlighted.
When your system recognizes a dangerous AIS target:                   3. Press the OK button.

· The target symbol changes to red and flashes.
· An alarm pop-up is displayed (this can be disabled if required).
· An alarm sounds (this can be disabled if required).

 Note: When the AIS receiver is connected and functioning, the
 system will check for dangerous targets within the safe zone and
 if enabled issue an alarm whenever necessary. Dangerous target
 alarm operates irrespective of the ON or OFF status of the AIS
 target display, or the VISIBLE/HIDDEN status of the safe zone
 ring.

Safety Messages
When the status of the AIS Safety Messages function is set to ON in
the Menu > AIS Layer Setup Menu, any incoming safety messages
from surrounding vessels, shore stations and mobile stations, are
displayed in a pop-up box. If known, the message will include the
sending vessel's position in lat/lon. You now have the option to:
· Remove the message (ACKNOWLEDGE).

140                                                                                                         C-Series Widescreen user reference
10.10 AIS options                                                     Parameter              Description                  Options

The AIS options are accessible in the chart application by pressing   Own Vessel Safe Zone   The safe zone is a ring,     · 0.1 nm
the AIS OPTIONS > MARPA & AIS OPTIONS softkeys, or the radar                                 centred on your boat,
                                                                                             within which a target is     · 0.2 nm
application by pressing the TARGET TRACKING > MARPA & AIS
OPTIONS softkeys.                                                                            considered dangerous         · 0.5 nm
                                                                                             if it will enter this zone
                                                                                             within the Time to Safe      · 1.0 nm
 Parameter             Description                 Options
                                                                                             Zone period (see below).     · 2.0 nm
 Vector Length         The time period             · 0.5 min
                       specified for drawing                          Time to Safe Zone      If a target enters your      · 3 min
                       length of vectors.          · 1 min                                   safe zone within this time
                                                                                             period, it is considered     · 6 min
                                                   · 3 min
                                                                                             dangerous.                   · 12 min
                                                   · 6 min
                                                                                                                          · 24 min
                                                   · 12 min
                                                                      Safe Zone Ring         Controls whether the         · Visible
                                                   · 30 min                                  safe zone ring is
                                                                                             displayed or hidden          · Hidden
                                                   · 60 min
                                                                                             on screen.
 Target History        Plots a target's previous   · OFF
                       position at specified
                       intervals. The four         · 0.5 min
                       most recent position        · 1 min
                       points are displayed.
                       If True target vectors      · 3 min
                       are selected, the four      · 6 min
                       most recent vessel
                       position points are also
                       displayed.




Using AIS                                                                                                                             141
10.11 AIS alarms                                                        10.12 Buddy tracking
The AIS functions generate a number of alarms to alert you to           You can configure your display to notify you when an AIS-equipped
dangerous or lost targets.                                              friend or "buddy" comes within range of your vessel.
In addition to the dangerous target alarm previously described, the     The Buddy Tracking feature enables you to add AIS-equipped
system generates an alarm when a dangerous target becomes a             friends and regular contacts to a "Buddy List" on your multifunction
lost target i.e. its signal has not been received for 20 seconds.       display. As soon as a vessel on your Buddy List sails into the range
                                                                        of your AIS receiver, the vessel icon changes to indicate this.
Your AIS receiver generates local alarms which are displayed and
sounded on your multifunction display whenever an alarm condition       How it works
exists on the unit.
                                                                        When the AIS Layer is enabled in the chart or radar application, AIS
Local AIS alarms                                                        targets are shown on your display. You can add any AIS target to
                                                                        a "Buddy List", each entry consisting of an MMSI number, and an
When the connected AIS unit generates an alarm, your multifunction
                                                                        optional name. Subsequently, whenever Buddy Tracking is enabled
display shows a local alarm message and indicates the alarm status
                                                                        on your mutlifunction display, and a "Buddy" vessel with an MMSI
in the data bar icon.
                                                                        number sails into the range of your AIS receiver, an AIS Buddy icon
Active AIS alarms list                                                  is displayed. Up to 100 vessels may be added to the Buddy List.

The active alarm list shows the status of each local alarm. This list   Pre-requisites
can either be accessed via the Menu > AIS Layer Setup Menu, or
                                                                        The following items are required for the Buddy Tracking feature:
from the Menu > Alarms Setup Menu.
                                                                        · For the purposes of using the Buddy Tracking feature, it is
 Note: When local AIS alarms are acknowledged, the target                 assumed that your display is already connected to a suitable
 is shown as dangerous (flashing, with a red outline), and the            AIS receiver.
 active alarm status icon is displayed until the target is no longer
 dangerous.                                                             · Only AIS-equipped vessels will be detected.



Acknowledging AIS alarms                                                Enabling and disabling buddy tracking
                                                                        1. Enable or disable the Buddy Tracking feature:
In the chart or radar application:
                                                                           i. In the chart or radar application, press the MENU button.
1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE softkey.                                          ii. Using the trackpad, select the AIS Layer Setup menu item.
                                                                           iii. Using the trackpad, select the Buddy Tracking menu item.
 Note: An AIS alarm remains active until it is acknowledged on
                                                                           iv. Using the trackpad, select the ON option to enable Buddy
 your multifunction display.
                                                                                Tracking, or the OFF option to disable it.

142                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
   v. Press the OK button.                                            2. If you are in the radar application, press the TARGET
2. Enable or disable AIS objects in the chart application:               TRACKING softkey.
   i. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                 3. Press the AIS LIST softkey.
   ii. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.                                   The AIS Target List is displayed.
   iii. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey.                               4. Using the trackpad, select the AIS target that you want to add
        The Chart Layers menu is displayed.                              to your Buddy List.
   iv. Using the trackpad, select the AIS Objects menu item.          5. Press the ADD TO BUDDY LIST softkey.
   v. Using the trackpad, select the ON option to enable AIS          6. Press the OK button.
        objects, or the OFF option to disable them, as appropriate.
   vi. Press the OK button.
3. Enable or disable AIS objects in the radar application:            Adding a vessel to your buddy list from main
   i. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                 menu
   ii. Press the AIS LAYER softkey until the ON or OFF option
        is selected, as appropriate.                                  In the chart or radar application:
   iii. Press the OK button.                                          1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                      2. Using the trackpad, select the AIS LAYER SETUP menu item.
                                                                      3. Using the trackpad, select the VIEW BUDDY LIST menu item.
Adding a vessel to your buddy list                                    4. Press the ADD VESSEL softkey.
In the chart or radar application:                                    5. In the MMSI field, enter a valid MMSI number (nine digits).
                                                                      6. Press the OK button.
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over an AIS target.
                                                                      7. In the NAME field, use the trackpad to enter a name. This could
    The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related       be the name of the vessel, or the name of the friend that owns
    options.                                                             the vessel, for example.
2. Press the ADD TO BUDDY LIST softkey.                               8. Press the OK button.
The MMSI and vessel name are automatically added to the Buddy
List.
                                                                      Editing a buddy's details
Adding a vessel to your buddy list from AIS                           1. In the chart or radar application, use the trackpad to move the
                                                                         cursor over an AIS target.
target list
                                                                           The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related
1. If you are in the chart application, press the AIS OPTIONS              options.
   softkey.
Using AIS                                                                                                                              143
2. Alternatively, press the MENU button, and select the AIS Layer       Displaying additional buddy information
   Setup menu.
3. Press the VIEW BUDDY LIST softkey.                                   In the chart or radar application:

   The AIS Buddy List dialog is displayed.                              1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over an AIS target.
4. Press the EDIT VESSEL DETAILS softkey.                                  The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related
                                                                           options.
   The Edit Buddy Vessel dialog is displayed.
                                                                        2. Press the BUDDY DATA AUTO ON OFF softkey.
5. In the MMSI field, edit the MMSI number (nine digits) if required.
                                                                        3. Select theON option.
6. (Optionally) In the NAME field, edit the existing name, or enter a
   new name. This could be the name of the vessel, or the name of          The Buddy's details are displayed.
   the friend who owns the vessel, for example.                         4. Press the OK button.
7. Press the OK button.


Deleting a buddy
1. In the chart or radar application, use the trackpad to move the
   cursor over an AIS target.
   The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related
   options.
2. Alternatively, press the MENU button, and select the AIS Layer
   Setup menu.
3. Press the VIEW BUDDY LIST softkey.
   The AIS Buddy List dialog is displayed.
4. Using the trackpad, highlight the Buddy that you want to delete.
5. Press the DELETE VESSEL softkey.
   A dialog is displayed, asking you to confirm the deletion.
6. Select YES to confirm that you wish to delete the buddy, or NO
   to abort.
7. Press the OK button.




144                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 11: Using the Course Deviation Indicator

Chapter contents
·    11.1 Course Deviation Indicator overview on page 146
·    11.2 Selecting the CDI application on page 146
·    11.3 Using the CDI Application on page 147




Using the Course Deviation Indicator                        145
11.1 Course Deviation Indicator overview                               11.2 Selecting the CDI application
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) gives a graphical                 1. Press and hold the PAGE button for three seconds, until the
representation of your vessel's course in a `rolling road' format.        Select Page Set window appears.
With your display receiving accurate heading and position              2. Using the rotary encoder or trackpad, highlight the page set that
information, you can use the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) to          you want to customize.
monitor your course and accurately steer to a target waypoint.         3. Press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey to edit the highlighted page
                                                                          set.
The CDI application shows a `rolling road', which represents a width
of sea equal to the Cross Track Error (XTE) limits that you have       4. Press the softkey associated with the page set you wish to edit.
specified in the Setup menu. As you travel towards the target          5. Using the rotary encoder or trackpad, highlight the page layout
waypoint, the checkered pattern and the waypoint will move down           style that you want for the page set.
the screen at a rate proportional to your boat's speed. Navigation     6. Press the OK button.
data is displayed alongside or below the rolling road.                 7. Using the rotary encoder or trackpad, highlight the CDI
The CDI application is pre-configured to display the CDI graphic.         Application.
You can customize the panel to display any available data.             8. If you have chosen a page layout featuring multiple applications,
                                                                          press the ACTIVE button to toggle between the windows (the
                                                                          currently selected window is highlighted in red) .
                                                                       9. Press the OK button to select the highlighted application for
                                                                          that page.

                                                                        Note: If the CDI application is placed in multiple windows, the
                                                                        same data is displayed in each.




146                                                                                                           C-Series Widescreen user reference
11.3 Using the CDI Application                                                 Going to a waypoint using the CDI application
                                                                               1. In the CDI application, press the GOTO softkey.
Monitoring Your Course Using CDI                                               2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.

You can use the `rolling road' format of the Course Deviation                     The Waypoint List is displayed.
Indicator (CDI) application to monitor your course.                            3. Using the trackpad, select the waypoint that you want to go to.
The steering instructions below the rolling road tell you what                 4. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.
correction is needed to maintain your course and arrive at the target
waypoint.                                                                       Note: Press the STOP GOTO softkey at any time to stop going
                                                                                towards the waypoint.
The following table explains these instructions.
                                                                                Note: If you have sailed off course while heading to a waypoint,
 Instruction             Cause                                                  you can press the RESTART XTE button at any time to restart
 STEER                   XTE error to port is more than a 1/4 of the maximum    Cross Track Error.
 STARBOARD               XTE error limit in the Setup menu.
 STEER PORT              XTE error to starboard is more than a 1/4 of the
                         maximum XTE error limit in the Setup menu
                                                                               Changing the data displayed in the CDI
                                                                               application
Indication arrows are placed either side of the steering instruction,
pointing towards the centre line. The greater the error the more               1. In the CDI application, press the MENU button.
arrows appear. You should correct your course by steering in the               2. Using the trackpad, select the Panel Setup Menu menu item.
direction indicated by the arrows.                                             3. Using the trackpad, select the Configure: CDI menu item.
                                                                                  A red outline appears around the main screen element in the
Following a route using the CDI application                                       CDI display.
                                                                               4. Using the trackpad, highlight the data element that you want
1. In the CDI application, press the GOTO softkey.                                to change.
2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey.                                     5. Press the SELECT DATA softkey.
   The Route List is displayed.                                                6. Using the trackpad, select the appropriate data group.
3. Using the trackpad, select the route that you want to follow.               7. Using the trackpad, highlight the data item that you want, then
                                                                                  press the trackpad right to select the appropriate option.
4. Press the OK button.
                                                                               8. Press the OK button.
                                                                               The CDI display will be updated to show the data that you specified.


Using the Course Deviation Indicator                                                                                                            147
148   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 12: Using the fishfinder

Chapter contents
·    12.1 Fishfinder introduction on page 150
·    12.2 The sonar image on page 151
·    12.3 Fishfinder presets on page 153
·    12.4 Fishfinder display modes on page 154
·    12.5 Fishfinder range on page 157
·    12.6 Fishfinder presentation options on page 159
·    12.7 Fishfinder waypoints on page 164
·    12.8 Fishfinder alarms on page 165
·    12.9 Setting up your fishfinder on page 166




Using the fishfinder                                    149
12.1 Fishfinder introduction                                          Fishfinder screen
                                                                      The fishfinder displays a scrolling image of the seabed, updating
            Warning: Sonar operation                                  from the right as your vessel makes progress.
            · NEVER operate the sounder with the boat out of
              the water.                                              Example fishfinder screen

            · NEVER touch the transducer face when the sounder
              is powered on.
            · SWITCH OFF the sounder if divers are likely to be
              within 25 ft (5 m) of the transducer.



Fishfinder overview
The fishfinder application provides a detailed view of the fish and
seabed under your vessel, enabling you to accurately distinguish
between different sizes of fish, bottom structure, and underwater
obstacles. The standard fishfinder image is a historical, scrolling
bottom graph with range and sonar frequency automatically selected
by the system.
The various functions and features of the fishfinder application      The fishfinder window includes the following aspects:
include:
                                                                      · The bottom together with any bottom structure such as reefs and
· Preset modes for easy optimal operation.                              shipwrecks etc.
· Display modes (Zoom, A-Scope or Bottom Lock).                       · Target images indicating fish.
· Adjustable range and zoom.                                          · A status bar noting the frequency and gain settings.
· Finding bottom feeding fish with the bottom lock display mode.
                                                                      · The bottom depth.
· Clutter and gain options to simplify the image.
· Pausing and adjusting the speed of the scrolling image.             Status icon

· Using waypoints to mark a position.                                 The fishfinder status icon is located in the top-right section of the
                                                                      screen:
· Determining depths and distances of targets.
· Fishfinder alarms (fish, depth or water temperature).

150                                                                                                            C-Series Widescreen user reference
                                                                          12.2 The sonar image


               D9534_1
(animated icon)
                                                                          Interpreting the seabed using sonar
                                                                          It is important to understand how to correctly interpret the seabed
· Icon animated - fishfinder is operating.                                structure represented in the fishfinder display.
· Icon static - the fishfinder transducer is connected but not            The seabed usually produces a strong echo.
  transmitting.
                                                                          The following images show how different seabed conditions are
· Icon greyed-out - no fishfinder transducer is connected.                represented in the sonar display:
                                                                           A hard bottom (sand) produces a thin line

How the fishfinder works
The fishfinder application uses a Digital Sounder Module (DSM) and
a suitable sonar transducer. The DSM interprets signals from the           A soft bottom (mud or seaweed cover) produces a wide line
                                                                                                                                 .
                                                                           The dark layer indicates a strong signal.
transducer and builds up a detailed underwater view.
The transducer is located on the bottom of the boat, it sends pulses
of sound waves into the water and measures the time it takes for the
sound wave to travel to the bottom and back. The returning echoes
                                                                           A rocky or uneven bottom or a wreck produces an irregular
are affected by bottom structure and by any other objects in their         image with peaks and troughs
path, for example reefs, wrecks, shoals or fish.
Colors are used on the display to indicate the strength of the returns.
You can use this information to determine the bottom structure,
the size of fish and other objects in the water, such as debris or
air bubbles




                                                                                                                                          D6855-2
 Note: Some transducers include additional sensors to measure
 water temperature and/or speed.
                                                                          The dark layers indicate a good echo; the lighter areas indicate
                                                                          weaker echoes. This could mean that the upper layer is soft and
                                                                          therefore allowing sound waves to pass to the more solid layer
                                                                          below.




Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                                151
It is also possible that the sound waves are making two complete
trips ­ hitting the seabed, bouncing off the vessel, then reflecting
off the seabed again. This can happen if the water is shallow, the
seabed is hard, or the gain is set high.


Factors influencing the sonar display
The quality and accuracy of the display can be influenced by a
number of factors including vessel speed, depth, object size,
background noise and transducer frequency.

Vessel speed
The shape of the target changes along with your speed. Slower
speeds return flatter, more horizontal marks. Higher speeds cause
the target to thicken and arch slightly, until at fast speeds the mark
resembles a double vertical line.
                                                                         Water depth
Target depth
                                                                         As sea depth increases signal strength decreases, resulting in a
The closer the target to the surface, the larger the mark on screen.     lighter on-screen image of the bottom.
 Note: The depth of individual targets can be displayed by               Size of the target
 switching on the Target Depth ID in the fishfinder setup menu.
 The number of target depths displayed is influenced by the fish         The larger the target, the larger the return on the fishfinder display.
 alarm sensitivity level.                                                The size of a fish target is also dependent upon the size of the fish's
                                                                         swim bladder rather than its overall size. The swim bladder varies in
                                                                         size between different breeds of fish.

                                                                         Transducer frequency
                                                                         The same target will appear differently when the transducer
                                                                         frequency is changed. The lower the frequency the broader the
                                                                         mark.




152                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
Clutter / Background noise                                            12.3 Fishfinder presets
The fishfinder picture may be impaired by echoes received from
floating or submerged debris, air bubbles or even the boats           The fishfinder provides you with four preset configurations available
movement. This is known as `background noise' or `clutter' and is     on the fishfinder toolbar. These enable you to quickly select
controlled by the gain modes. The system will automatically control   appropriate settings tailored for various situations.
the gain settings according to the depth and water conditions. You    Each preset has been configured to provide the best operating
can however adjust the gain settings manually if you prefer.          parameters for the fishfinder. However, it is possible to manually
                                                                      adjust the presets if necessary. The four presets are:
                                                                      · Single -- this preset provides quick access to a single-frequency
                                                                        configuration, suitable for general fishing conditions.
                                                                      · Dual -- this preset provides a dual frequency configuration.
                                                                        You can either display two different frequencies at the same
                                                                        time in one window, or display one frequency at full-screen on
                                                                        your master display and the other frequency at full-screen on an
                                                                        additional networked display.
                                                                      · Shallow -- this preset opitimizes the fishfinder display for shallow
                                                                        waters.
                                                                      · Deep -- this preset opitimizes the fishfinder display for deep
                                                                        waters.

                                                                      Display modes
                                                                      When using presets, you can either select the relevant preset and
                                                                      start using the default configuration immediately, or you can adjust
                                                                      the preset to your needs using the display modes:
                                                                      · Zoom
                                                                      · Bottom Lock
                                                                      · A-Scope
                                                                      Any changes you make to a preset are retained when you switch
                                                                      off the power to your multifunction display.



Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                       153
Selecting a fishfinder preset                                            12.4 Fishfinder display modes
From the fishfinder main screen:
1. Press the appropriate softkey to select from:                         Selecting a fishfinder display mode
      · PRESET 1 SINGLE,                                                 When a fishfinder preset is selected, its softkey label changes to
                                                                         ADJUST. Pressing this softkey allows you to configure the display
      · PRESET 2 DUAL,                                                   mode settings to suit your requirements. (Changes to the display
      · PRESET 3 SHALLOW or                                              mode are saved with the preset at power-off.)

      · PRESET 4 DEEP                                                    From the fishfinder main screen:

After a few moments, the fishfinder display will change to the new       1. Press the appropriate ADJUST... softkey.
mode. This is indicated in the top left-hand corner of the status bar.   2. With dual frequency screens select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select
                                                                            which frequency display you wish to change.
                                                                         3. Press the SELECT VIEW softkey.
                                                                         4. Use the trackpad up/down to select the required display mode:
                                                                            · None,
                                                                            · Zoom,
                                                                            · Bottom Lock or
                                                                            · A-Scope
                                                                         5. Press OK when complete.


                                                                         Fishfinder zoom mode
                                                                         The zoom display mode magnifies a region of the fishfinder screen
                                                                         to display more detail.
                                                                         This zoom option enables you to:
                                                                         · Replace the standard fishfinder image with the zoomed image,
                                                                           or display the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder
                                                                           image.
                                                                         · Set the zoom factor to a predefined level, or adjust it manually.

154                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
· Reposition the zoomed portion of the image to a different point    5. Press the OK button.
  in the display.
                                                                     Selecting zoom split screen
When the range increases, the area shown in the zoom window
also increases.                                                      With the fishfinder in zoom mode:

Zoom split                                                           1. Press the ZOOM softkey to select FULL or SPLIT as required.
With the zoom display mode you can split the screen and display      Adjusting the fishfinder zoom factor
the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder image (ZOOM
SPLIT). The zoomed section is indicated on the standard fishfinder   When the zoom function is active (ZOOM FULL or ZOOM SPLIT),
screen by a zoom box.                                                you can either select a predefined zoom factor or adjust it manually.
                                                                     With the fishfinder in zoom mode:
                                                                     1. Press the ZOOM FACTOR softkey to toggle between predefined
                                                                        settings or select xR to set a factor manually. For manual
                                                                        settings, adjust the zoom factor with the trackpad.
                                                                     2. Press the OK button.

                                                                     Adjusting the position of the fishfinder zoomed area
                                                                     When the zoom function is selected, the system automatically
                                                                     selects the zoom position so that the bottom details are always in the
                                                                     lower half of the display. If required you can reposition the portion of
                                                                     the image to be zoomed so that an alternative area is displayed.
                                                                     With the fishfinder in zoom mode:
                                                                     1. Press the ZOOM POSITION softkey until the MAN option is
                                                                        selected.
Enabling fishfinder zoom mode                                        2. Use the rotary control to reposition the zoomed area as required.
                                                                     3. Press the OK button.
From the main fishfinder screen:
1. Press the appropriate ADJUST... softkey.
2. With dual frequency screens select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select       Fishfinder A-Scope mode
   which frequency display you wish to change.
                                                                     The A-Scope mode enables you to view a live (rather than historical)
3. Press the SELECT VIEW softkey.
                                                                     image of the seabed and fish directly below your vessel.
4. Use the trackpad to select the ZOOM option.

Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                     155
The standard fishfinder display shows a historical record of fishfinder      Enabling the Fishfinder A-Scope Mode
echoes. If required, you can display a live image of the bottom
structure and the fish directly below the transducer by using the            From the fishfinder main screen:
A-Scope feature. The width of the bottom covered by the A-Scope              1. Press the appropriate ADJUST... softkey.
is indicated at the bottom of the window. A-Scope provides a more
precise and easier to interpret indication of the target strength.           2. For dual frequency screens, select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select
                                                                                which frequency display you wish to change.
There are three A-Scope modes, as illustrated in the diagram below:          3. Press the SELECT VIEW softkey.
                                                                             4. Use the trackpad up/down to select A-SCOPE.
                                                                             5. Press OK when complete.

                                                                              Note: Enabling A-Scope mode automatically switches OFF
                                                                              Bottom Lock and Zoom.



                                                                             Bottom Lock
                                                                             The Bottom Lock function applies a filter to flatten the image of the
                                                                             seabed and make any objects on or just above it easier to discern.
                                                                             This feature is particularly useful for finding fish that feed close to
                                                                             the bottom.
                                                                             Bottom Lock is selected for individual fishfinder windows and
                                                                             can replace or appear alongside the standard fishfinder image.
                                                                             Adjusting the range of the bottom lock image allows you to view
                                                                             more bottom details. You can also reposition the image on screen to
                                                                             anywhere between the bottom of the window (0%) and the middle of
                                                                             the window (50%) by using the Bottom Shift control.


                                                            MODE 3
                                   MODE 2                   The A-scope
                                   The left-hand side       image angles
            MODE 1                 of the Mode 1            outward as
            The A-scope            image is expanded        signal width
            image is centred       to give a more           increases with
            in the window.         detailed view.           depth.




156                                                                                                                   C-Series Widescreen user reference
                                                                    12.5 Fishfinder range
                                                                    The Range and Range Shift functions enable you to change the
                                                                    range of depth displayed by the fishfinder.

                                                                    Range
                                                                    The Range function enables you to define the range of depth that
                                                                    you see in the fishfinder display.
                                                                    By default, the fishfinder display shows the shallowest required
                                                                    range, enabling you to clearly see what is near the surface of the
                                                                    water under your vessel. This is useful for finding smaller fish that
                                                                    feed nearer the surface. An example of this kind of depth range is 0
                                                                    to 200 feet. In this case, the range is 200 feet, so 200 feet of water
                                                                    will be displayed on-screen at any one time.
                                                                    There may be circumstances in which you want to see a less
Bottom Lock is selected for individual fishfinder windows and can   detailed image showing a greater amount of depth beneath your
either replace (ON) or appear alongside (SPLIT) the standard        vessel. This is useful for locating bigger fish and other objects
fishfinder image.                                                   located closer to the seabed such as wrecks. An example of this
                                                                    kind of depth range is 0 to 1000 feet or greater. In this case, the
Enabling Bottom Lock
                                                                    range is 1000 feet, and you will be able to see 1000 feet of water
From the fishfinder main screen:                                    beneath your vessel, without needing to scroll the display up or
                                                                    down.
1. Press the appropriate ADJUST... softkey.
2. For dual frequency screens select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select       Range Shift
   which frequency display you wish to change.                      The Range Shift function enables you to define which area of the
3. Press the SELECT VIEW softkey.                                   overall depth you want to be able to see on-screen. For example,
4. Use the trackpad up/down to select BOTTOM LOCK.                  if your range is 5000 feet and the display is showing the surface
5. Press OK when complete.                                          (0 feet) at the very top of the display, and 5000 feet at the bottom
                                                                    of the display, you can use the Range Shift function to focus on a
Adjusting the bottom lock range/position                            different 5000 feet range. For example, 2000 feet at the very top of
                                                                    the screen, and 7000 feet at the very bottom of the screen.
With the fishfinder in bottom lock mode:
1. Use the appropriate softkeys and the trackpad to set Full /
   Split screen, Bottom lock range and Bottom shift values as
   appropriate.

Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                   157
Example screen with range and range shift used to view the seabed   Using fishfinder range shift
at a depth range of 40­80 ft
                                                                    The DSM automatically adjusts the display to keep the bottom in
                                                                    the lower half of the display window. Alternatively you can shift the
                                                                    image within the current range. Changes to the range shift are
                                                                    reflected in all fishfinder windows.
                                                                    1. Press the RANGE control to open the range toolbar.
                                                                    2. Press the RANGE softkey repeatedly until the MAN option is
                                                                       selected.
                                                                    3. Press the RANGE SHIFT softkey.
                                                                    4. Select your desired setting using the trackpad.
                                                                    5. Press OK.




Changing the fishfinder depth range
You can choose from either:
· an automatic adjustment whereby the display automatically show
  the shallowest required range.
· manual adjustment of the depth range, up to the maximum depth
  displayed on the scrolling bottom and A-Scope images.
Changes to the range affect all fishfinder windows.
1.    Press the RANGE button.
2.    Toggle to AUTO or MAN using the RANGE softkey.
3.    Use the rotary controller to adjust the depth range.
4.    Press OK.



158                                                                                                         C-Series Widescreen user reference
12.6 Fishfinder presentation options                                   · Low (Cruising) is ideal for viewing fishfinder images with a
                                                                         minimum of background noise as you are cruising to your fishing
The PRESENTATION softkey gives you access to a features                  spot. Only the strongest echoes are displayed.
and functions which enhance the fishfinder display and provide
                                                                       · Medium (Trolling) is a slightly higher gain setting that displays
additional on-screen functionality.
                                                                         more detail. This is the default mode.
Presentation options include:
                                                                       · High (Fishing) provides the most detail, but also displays the
· Gain settings to enhance display clarity.                              most background noise and surface clutter.
· Power to the transducer.
                                                                       Manual
· VRM features for measuring depth distance.
                                                                       If necessary you can set the gain controls manually, between a
· Dual frequency view options.                                         value of 1 to 100 (default value is 75). This value should be set
                                                                       high enough to see fish and bottom detail but without too much
· Scroll pause and resume.
                                                                       background noise. Generally a high gain is used in deep and/or
                                                                       clear water; a low gain in shallow and/or murky water.
Sonar gain                                                             The new values remain set even when you switch off the display,
                                                                       they are applied to both the active window and any other fishfinder
The gain settings alter the way the DSM processes background           windows with the same frequency.
noise (also called clutter). Adjusting the gain settings can improve
the sonar image, however for optimum performance in most               Selecting automatic fishfinder gain
conditions, we recommend that you use the auto settings.
                                                                       From the main fishfinder screen:
The gain adjusts the return threshold (echo strength) above which
the fishfinder will show an object on the screen.                      1.   Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                       2.   Press the GAIN softkey.
There are two gain modes:
                                                                       3.   Press the GAIN softkey until the AUTO option is selected.
· Auto                                                                 4.   Use the trackpad to select the auto mode you want.
· Manual                                                               5.   Press the OK button.

Auto                                                                   Adjusting the fishfinder gain manually
In Auto mode, the DSM sonar automatically adjusts the gain setting     From the main fishfinder screen:
to suit current conditions. Any adjustments made apply to all
fishfinder windows using that particular frequency.                    1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                       2. Press the GAIN softkey.
There are three Auto modes, each suited to different scenarios:
                                                                       3. Press the GAIN softkey until the MAN option is selected.

Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                       159
4. Use the rotary control to select the amount of gain you want,        4. Use the rotary control to select the amount of color gain you
   between a value of 1 to 100. (The default value is 75).                 want.
5. Press the OK button.                                                 5. Press the OK button.
The new values remain set even when you switch off the display,         The new values remain set even when you switch off the display
they are applied to both the active window and any other fishfinder     and are applied to all fishfinder windows.
windows displaying the same frequency.

                                                                        Fishfinder color threshold
Fishfinder color gain
                                                                        The color threshold setting determines the range of colors used on
You can adjust the color gain to change the signal strength threshold   screen. The effect of this is to set a color threshold below which
for the strongest color in your fishfinder display.                     targets are not shown. For example a low setting would result in
                                                                        only the strongest (orange and red) targets being displayed.
Color gain sets the lower limit for the strongest echo color. All
echoes with a signal strength above this value are displayed in the
                                                                        Adjusting the fishfinder color threshold
strongest color. Those with a weaker value are divided equally
between the remaining colors.                                           From the main fishfinder screen:
· Setting a low value produces wide band for the weakest color, but     1.   Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
  a small signal band for the other colors.                             2.   Press the GAIN softkey.
· Setting a high value gives a wide band for the strongest color, but   3.   Press the COLOR THRESHOLD softkey.
  a small signal band for the other colors.                             4.   Use the rotary controller to select the required color threshold.
There are two color gain modes:                                         5.   Press the OK button.
· Auto. In Auto mode the color gain setting is automatically
  adjusted to suit current conditions. Any adjustments made apply
  to all fishfinder windows.
                                                                        Fishfinder TVG (Time Varied Gain)
· Manual. You can set the color gain manually, between a value          The Time Varied Gain (TVG) function reduces the amount of clutter
  of 1 to 100.                                                          in the fishfinder display by varying the gain throughout the column of
                                                                        water. This function is useful for reducing the appearance of `noise'.
Adjusting the fishfinder color gain
                                                                        · Increasing the TVG value increases the maximum depth to which
From the main fishfinder screen:                                          TVG is applied. A high value decreases the gain in shallow water
                                                                          so that only the strongest echoes are displayed.
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the GAIN softkey.                                              · Decreasing the TVG value reduces the maximum depth. A low
3. Press the COLOR GAIN softkey until the MAN option is selected.         TVG value has little effect on gain in shallow water.

160                                                                                                               C-Series Widescreen user reference
TVG adjustment can be made automatically or manually.                     Adjusting the fishfinder power

Adjusting the fishfinder time varied gain                                 From the main fishfinder screen:

 Note: TVG has no effect in fishfinder simulator mode.                    1.   Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                          2.   Press the POWER softkey until the MAN option is selected.
1. From the main fishfinder screen, press the PRESENTATION                3.   Use the rotary control to select the amount of power you want.
   softkey.                                                               4.   Press the OK button.
2. Press the GAIN softkey.                                                The new values remain set even when you switch off the display
3. Press the TVG softkey until the MAN option is selected.                and are applied to all fishfinder windows.
4. Use the rotary control to select the amount of Time Varied Gain
   you want.
5. Press the OK button.                                                   Depth and distance with the fishfinder
                                                                          You can use VRM markers and depth lines to help you determine
Fishfinder power                                                          depths and distances in the fishfinder display.
                                                                          The fishfinder display provides a number of features to help you
The fishfinder power setting enables you to adjust the power of the       determine depths and distances. These features are illustrated and
DSM sonar signal. This is useful for accommodating different water        described in more detail below:
depths and vessel speeds.
The power setting for the DSM sonar can be adjusted to suit
different conditions, such as water depth and vessel speed. By
default, the power setting is adjusted automatically to suit current
conditions, but the setting can also be adjusted manually if required.
· Lower power levels are suitable for depths of less than 2.4 m (8 ft).
· Higher power levels are generally more suited to depths greater
  than 3.7 m (12 ft).
There are two power modes:
· Auto. In Auto mode, the power setting is automatically adjusted
  to suit current conditions.
· Manual. You can set the power setting manually, between a value
  of 1 to 100%, in 10% increments.


Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                        161
                                                                                                · VRMs - to indicate the distance behind your boat and the depth
                                                                                                  below of selected objects.

VRM marker
                                                                                                Measuring depth and distance with VRM
indicating
distance                                                                                        You can use a Variable Range Marker (VRM) to determine an
behind boat                                                                                     object's depth and distance behind your vessel. These markers
                                                                                                consist of a horizontal (depth) line and a vertical (distance) line,
Depth line
                       49                                     49                      49
                                                                                                each of which are marked with the appropriate measurement and
VRM marker
indicating                                                                                      are controlled individually.
depth of target

                                63             63
                                                                                                From the main fishfinder screen:
Depth
reading                                                                69
                                     70   70
                                                             74        74
                                                                                           70
                                                                                                1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                            78   78
                                                                                                2. Press the SCROLL softkey to pause the display. This may make
                                                                                                   it easier to position the VRM over the desired object.
                                                                                                3. Press the VRM softkey to open the VRM toolbar.
                                                                                                4. Press the VRM softkey again until the ON is selected.
                                                         Cursor                                 5. Measure the depth or distance:
                                                    (depth indicated
                                                      in data bar)                                 · Press the VRM RANGE softkey to measure distance, or
                                                                                                   · Press the VRM DEPTH softkey to measure depth.
· Depth reading - your current depth displayed. The size and
  position of this digit can be changed via the Fishfinder Display                              6. Use the rotary control to measure the distance or depth to your
  Setup menu.                                                                                      target.
· Depth lines - horizontal dashed lines drawn at regular intervals to                           7. Press the OK button to save the position.
  indicate the depth from the surface. These are switched on/off via
                                                                                                 Note: The VRMs used in the fishfinder application are unrelated
  the Fishfinder Display Setup menu
                                                                                                 to the VRMs used in the radar application.
· Depth Target ID - depths noted against recognized targets.
  The sensitivity of these IDs is directly linked to the Fish Alarm
  sensitivity; the greater the fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the
  number of labelled returns. These targets are switched on/off via                             Fishfinder scrolling
  the Fishfinder Display Setup menu.
                                                                                                The fishfinder display scrolls from right to left. You can adjust or
· Cursor depth - the depth and the distance from your boat marked                               pause the display scrolling, for example to ease placing of waypoints
  by the cursor, is indicated in the data bar at the top of the screen.                         or VRMs on-screen.
  This performs in a similar way to a VRM, but without lines.

162                                                                                                                                     C-Series Widescreen user reference
Adjusting the scroll speed                                               Adjusting the fishfinder scrolling speed
You can adjust the speed at which the display scrolls, but the same      From the fishfinder screen:
section of the bottom is displayed regardless of scrolling speed.
A faster speed displays more detail. This is useful when you are         1. Press the MENU button.
looking for fish. If you select a slower speed the information remains   2. Use the trackpad to highlight the Fishfinder Setup menu item,
on the display for longer.                                                  then press the trackpad right to select it.
The following options are available:                                     3. Use the trackpad to select the Manual Scroll Speed option, then
                                                                            press the trackpad right to select it.
· Manual. This allows you to set the scroll speed as a percentage of     4. Use the rotary control to adjust the scroll speed to the required
  the maximum scroll rate for that depth. The lower the percentage,         value.
  the slower the image will scroll. The default is manual adjustment
  with a full speed scroll (100%).                                       5. Press the OK button.

· Automatic. The system automatically adjusts the scroll speed,           Note: If you have configured a transducer with no paddle wheel,
  based on boat speed:                                                    selecting AUTO will result in full speed scrolling (100%)

  ­ Less than, or equal to 0.5 kt, scroll speed is constant at 10%.
                                                                         Pausing the fishfinder scrolling image
  ­ Between 0.5­15 kt, scroll speed varies linearly with boat speed.
                                                                         From the main fishfinder screen:
  ­ Greater than 15 kt, scroll speed is constant at 100%.
                                                                         1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
Pausing the scrolling image                                              2. Press the SCROLL softkey to pause the display.
You can pause the display to see a `snapshot' of the image. When a       3. Press the OK button.
display is paused, scrolling stops but the depth indication continues
to be updated. Scroll pause/resume affects the currently selected
fishfinder frequency (200 kHz, 50 kHz or BOTH).                          Dual / Single frequency fishfinder
If you are in dual frequency mode, you can pause one frequency           Dual frequency operation allows the sonar to operate and display 2
while the other continues to scroll. This allows you to inspect a        frequencies simultaneously. If the preset mode that you are using
paused image, while the other frequency continues to scroll and          has two frequencies, you can view either one or both of those
detect fish.                                                             frequencies in separate windows.
 Note: Scrolling will resume if the frequency changes. For
                                                                         Setting Dual / Single frequency view
 example an automatic change of frequency resulting from of a
 change in depth.                                                        From the main fishfinder screen:
                                                                         1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.


Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                      163
2. Press the VIEW softkey to toggle between F1, F2 or BOTH         12.7 Fishfinder waypoints
   options.
3. Press OK.                                                       Placing a waypoint on the fishfinder display enables you to mark a
                                                                   position that you can return to later.
Enabling dual frequency transducers                                When a waypoint is placed, its details are added to the waypoint list
 Note: The DUAL preset has dual frequency values as a default      and a vertical line labelled WPT is displayed on screen. You can edit
 setting.                                                          waypoints and navigate to them in the fishfinder window.

1. With a fishfinder window active, press the MENU button.
2. Use the trackpad to highlight the Fishfinder Setup menu item,
   then press the trackpad right to select it.
3. Select Configure Frequency Presets.
4. Use the trackpad to assign the required preset frequencies.




                                                                   Placing a Waypoint on the Fishfinder Display
                                                                   With the fishfinder screen active:
                                                                   1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
                                                                   2. Select the appropriate option: WAYPOINT AT CURSOR ,
                                                                      WAYPOINT AT VESSEL, or WAYPOINT AT LAT/LON.




164                                                                                                       C-Series Widescreen user reference
12.8 Fishfinder alarms                                                    Menu Item                 Description                   Options

The display can be configured to provide a number of fishfinder           Fish Alarm                Alarm which responds          OFF, ON
alarms.                                                                                             to quantities of fishfinder
                                                                                                    targets
The following fishfinder alarms can be set when you are connected
to a DSM, or when the simulator is on:                                    Fish Alarm Sensitivity    If the Fish Alarm is          1 to 10
                                                                                                    set to ON, an alarm is
· Fish alarms sound when a target meets the specified sensitivity                                   triggered when the fish
  level and, is within the depth limits (if enabled). The greater the                               return strength reaches
  fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the number of target image                                    the sensitivity that you
  depths displayed.                                                                                 specify.
· Shallow/Deep alarms sound when the DSM detects that the                 Fish Alarm Depth Limits   If the Fish Alarm and         OFF, ON
  depth is less than the shallow limit, or greater than the deep limit.                             this alarm is set to ON,
                                                                                                    an alarm is triggered
                                                                                                    (2 beeps) if any target
Setting up fishfinder alarms                                                                        meets the sensitivity
                                                                                                    level and is within the
Fishfinder alarms are configured within the alarms set up menu.                                     Shallow Fish Limit and
1. Press the MENU button.                                                                           Deep Fish Limit that you
                                                                                                    specify.
2. Use the trackpad to highlight the Alarm Setup menu item, then
   press the trackpad right to select the menu item.                      Shallow Fish Limit        Specifies the lower value     0002 ft to 1000 ft
3. Select the Fishfinder Alarms Setup option.                                                       for the Fish Alarm Depth
4. Use the trackpad to make the required changes.                                                   Limit.
5. Press the OK button to save the changes.                               Deep Fish Limit           Specifies the upper           0002 ft to 1000 ft
                                                                                                    value for the Fish Alarm
                                                                                                    Depth Limit
Fishfinder alarms setup
                                                                          Shallow Depth Alarm       Switches the shallow          OFF, ON
This section describes the settings you can change using the                                        depth alarm on or off. If
fishfinder alarms setup menu.                                                                       a DSM is not connected,
                                                                                                    this cannot be set.




Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                                   165
 Menu Item                Description                 Options              12.9 Setting up your fishfinder
 Shallow Depth Alarm      If the Shallow Depth        0002 ft to maximum
 Value                    Alarm is set to ON, an      transducer range     Opening the fishfinder setup menu
                          alarm is triggered if the
                          depth drops below the                            1. Make a fishfinder window active.
                          value you specify.                               2. Press the MENU button.
 Deep Depth Alarm         Deep Depth Alarm            OFF, ON              3. Select Fishfinder Setup from the list of options.
                          Switches the deep depth
                          alarm on or off. If a DSM
                          is not connected, this                           Fishfinder setup menu options
                          cannot be set.
                                                                           This section describes the settings you can change using the
 Deep Depth Alarm Value   If the Deep Depth Alarm     0002 ft to maximum   fishfinder setup menu. The setup menu contains settings that are
                          is set to ON, an alarm      transducer range     likely to be changed infrequently.
                          is triggered if the depth
                          exceeds the value that
                          you specify.                                      Menu Item              Description                Options
                                                                            Configure Preset       Enables you to adjust      AUTO or manual
                                                                            Frequencies            the frequencies used       frequencies.
                                                                                                   for the four fishfinder
                                                                                                   presets. For each
                                                                                                   preset, you can select
                                                                                                   AUTO for fully automatic
                                                                                                   selection, or you can
                                                                                                   manually specify the
                                                                                                   frequency. You can
                                                                                                   also reset all the
                                                                                                   preset frequencies to
                                                                                                   the factory defaults if
                                                                                                   required.
                                                                            Depth Digit Size       Size of the digit that     · Small
                                                                                                   indicates the depth.
                                                                                                                              · Medium
                                                                                                                              · Large


166                                                                                                                   C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu Item              Description                   Options                 Menu Item             Description                Options
 Depth Digit Position   Position of the digit that    · Bottom                Manual Scroll Speed   If the Scroll menu item    10 to 100%
                        indicates the depth.                                                        is set to MANUAL,
                                                      · Top                                         specify the percentage
 Target Depth ID        Controls whether the          · On                                          of the normal speed that
                        depth of identified                                                         screen should scroll at
                        targets are displayed.        · Off
                        The level of targets
                        displayed is directly                                Fishfinder preset configuration
                        linked to the level of Fish
                        Alarm sensitivity.                                   Sonar frequency
 Depth Lines            Controls whether              · On                   The frequency of the sonar determines the width of the sonar
                        horizontal lines                                     beam and the depth to which the signals will penetrate. Each of
                        indicating depth are          · Off
                                                                             the 4 preset operating modes has its own frequency settings. The
                        displayed.                                           frequency setting is indicated in the status bar.
 Color Palette          Various color palettes        · Classic Blue         There are 3 available frequency settings:
                        are available to suit
                        different conditions          · Classic Black        · 50 kHz produces a wide sonar beam and penetrates the water
                        and your personal                                      well. It provides a lower resolution image that may not be as good
                                                      · Classic White          at detecting small fish. Typically use this if you require a large
                        preferences.
                                                      · Sunburst               coverage beneath your boat or if you are in deep water.

                                                      · Greyscale            · 200 kHz produces narrow beam of quicker shorter sonar waves.
                                                                               These produce a high resolution image but do not penetrate the
                                                      · Inverted Greyscale     water as well as the lower frequency. This frequency is most
                                                                               useful in shallower water (up to 1000 ft).
                                                      · Copper
                                                      · Night Vision         · Auto. When operating in automatic frequency your DSM
                                                                               automatically selects the appropriate frequency for your depth,
 Scroll                 Select AUTO to vary the       · Manual                 50 kHz in deep water and 200 kHz in shallower water.
                        scroll speed in relation
                        to your boat's speed or       · Auto
                        MANUAL to specify the
                        Scroll Speed.



Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                          167
Dual operation                                                        3. Select from the list of menu options:
For dual frequency operation you can set Frequency 2 for the             · Transducer Settings
required preset operating modes.
                                                                         · DSM Settings
Setting the fishfinder frequency
                                                                      Fishfinder DSM Setup Menu Options
With the configure presets frequencies options you can:
                                                                      Nearby vessels equipped with a fishfinder, or certain physical
· Specify one or two frequencies for each of the four presets.        conditions (like hard seabeds), can affect the DSM. Its setup menus
                                                                      enable you to change settings to allow for this.
· Edit preset names.
· Reset presets to factory defaults.                                   Menu Item               Description                    Options
1.    From the main fishfinder screen, press the MENU button.          DSM Reset               Restore all settings           Yes, No
2.    Select Fishfinder Setup from the list of options.                                        on the DSM to
3.    Select Configure Preset Frequencies from the list of options.                            factory default. When
4.    Make the required changes for each preset mode (P1 to P4)                                performing a DSM
                                                                                               Reset, it is normal to
Changing fishfinder preset names                                                               briefly loose connection
                                                                                               with the DSM.
1.    From the main fishfinder screen, press the MENU button.
                                                                       Trip Counter Reset      Resets the Trip Counter        Yes, No
2.    Select Fishfinder Setup from the list of options.                                        of the DSM.
3.    Select Configure Preset Frequencies from the list of options.
4.    Use the trackpad to select the required preset.                  SONAR Interference      Removes spikes                 Auto, Low, Medium,
                                                                       Rejection               caused by other                High
5.    Press the EDIT NAME softkey
                                                                                               fishfinder-equipped
6.    Use the rotary control and trackpad to change the name                                   vessels.
7.    Press OK when complete.
                                                                       2nd Echo Interference   Adjusts the ping rate          Off, Low, High
                                                                       Rejection               in small increments,
Transducer and DSM settings                                                                    according to the 2nd
                                                                                               echo level. This results
Selecting the DSM and transducer settings                                                      in better sensitivity of the
                                                                                               image.
From the main fishfinder screen:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Fishfinder Setup from the list of options.

168                                                                                                                 C-Series Widescreen user reference
 Menu Item              Description                 Options                    calibrate the transducer(s) by applying offsets to depth, speed and
                                                                               temperature. As these settings are held in the DSM and relate to
 Ping Rate Limit (per   Provides a speed limiter;   5 to 30 pings per second   the transducer, they are applied system-wide.
 second)                it is useful to adjust      (30 default)
                        the ping rate to suit                                  Fishfinder transducer settings
                        local conditions. For
                        example, the ping rate                                  Menu Item               Description                Options
                        may be too fast when                                    Select Transducer       Select the appropriate     · B256/M256
                        there is a hard bottom                                                          transducer type from
                        in shallow water. This                                                          those displayed.           · B260/M260/SS560
                        setting reverts to 26
                        pings per second when                                                                                      · R99/R199
                        the DSM unit is powered                                                                                    · B258
                        off.
                                                                                                                                   · SS270/B264
 Ping Enable            The sonar ping is           Disabled, Enabled
                        normally enabled. It                                                                                       · , B164
                        can be disabled. This                                                                                      · R209/R299
                        is useful when other
                        equipment is being                                      Select Speed            Select the appropriate     · NONE
                        tested, or if someone is                                Transducer              speed transducer from
                        diving beneath the boat.                                                        those available. This      · UNKNOWN
                        This setting reverts to                                                         option is only available   · B120/P120 ST600
                        Enabled when the DSM                                                            if you are not using a
                        unit is powered off.                                                            combined Depth/Speed       · ST69
                                                                                                        or Depth/Speed/Tem-        · B120/P120 ST800
Fishfinder Transducer Calibration                                                                       perature transducer.
                                                                                                                                   · CS4500
Your fishfinder transducer must be calibrated correctly to achieve
accurate depth readings.                                                        Frequency Calibration   Fine tune the frequency    · 200 kHz. Tune from
                                                                                                        of the transducer.           180 to 220 kHz
The multifunction display receives the image from a DSM which
processes sonar signals from a transducer mounted in the water.                                                                    · 50 kHz. Tune from 45
If the transducer is equipped with a speed paddle wheel and                                                                          to 55 kHz
temperature-sensing thermistor, the DSM calculates speed and
temperature. To ensure accurate readings, it may be necessary to




Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                                   169
 Menu Item            Description              Options
 Depth Offset         Offset represents        --9.9 to +9.9 feet
 (waterline)          the depth of the
                      transducer (relative
                      to the waterline).
 Speed Offset         Offset applied to the    0 to 100%
                      speed log.
 Temperature Offset   Offset applied to the    --9.9 to +9.9 °F
                      temperature transducer
                      value.




170                                                                 C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 13: Using the engine monitor

Chapter contents
·    13.1 Engine monitor overview on page 172
·    13.2 Displaying the engine monitor application on page 172
·    13.3 Setting up the engine monitor application on page 173
·    13.4 Changing what the engine monitor displays on page 173
·    13.5 Silencing engine monitor alarms on page 174




Using the engine monitor                                          171
13.1 Engine monitor overview                                             13.2 Displaying the engine monitor
The engine monitor application enables you to view key engine data
                                                                         application
in your multifunction display.
                                                                         1. Hold down the PAGE button until the Select Page Set screen is
The engine monitor application enables you to view information in           displayed.
the form of gauges and digital data, from up to three compatible         2. Using the trackpad, select a page set that includes the Engine
engines. To provide a fast update rate, the engine data is transferred      Monitoring application.
from the engine's serial interface to your multifunction display via
                                                                         3. Press the OK button.
NMEA2000/SeaTalk2.
If the default range of data shown by the engine monitor application      Note: If none of the page sets include the Engine Monitoring
is not suitable, you can change what is displayed.                        application, press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey, then follow the
                                                                          on-screen instructions.
 Note: For details of compatible engines and related
 software updates, please refer to the Raymarine website at
 www.raymarine.com.




172                                                                                                           C-Series Widescreen user reference
13.3 Setting up the engine monitor                                      13.4 Changing what the engine monitor
application                                                             displays
In the engine monitor application:                                      In the engine monitor application:
1. Press the MENU button.                                               1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the trackpad, select the Panel Setup Menu menu item.           2. Using the trackpad, select the Panel Setup Menu menu item.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Number of Engines menu item,       3. Using the trackpad, select the appropriate Configure: menu item.
   then press the trackpad right to select the appropriate value.
                                                                           A red outline appears around the main screen element in the
4. Press the OK button.
                                                                           engine monitoring application.
5. Using the trackpad, highlight the Maximum tachometer range
                                                                        4. Using the trackpad, highlight the data element that you want
   menu item, then press the trackpad right to select the appropriate
                                                                           to change.
   value.
                                                                        5. Press the SELECT DATA softkey.
6. Press the OK button.
                                                                        6. Using the trackpad, select the appropriate data group.
                                                                        7. Using the trackpad, highlight the data item that you want, then
                                                                           press the trackpad right to select the appropriate option.
                                                                        8. Press the OK button.
                                                                        The engine monitoring display will be updated to show the data
                                                                        that you specified.




Using the engine monitor                                                                                                                 173
13.5 Silencing engine monitor alarms
In the engine monitor application:
1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE softkey.

 Note: When engine monitoring is active, all other system alarms
 are still raised when appropriate.




174                                                                C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 14: Using the data application

Chapter contents
·    14.1 Data application overview on page 176
·    14.2 Pre-configured data in the data application on page 176
·    14.3 Customizing the data application on page 178




Using the data application                                          175
14.1 Data application overview                                     14.2 Pre-configured data in the data
The data application displays system and instrument data on your
                                                                   application
multifunction display.
                                                                   By default, the data application displays a pre-configured range of
The data application enables you to view numeric data generated    system and instrument data in a number of data 'panels'. Each
by the system. It also shows data from instruments connected to    panel consists of a number of 'cells', each containing a different
your multifunction display using the NMEA or SeaTalk protocols.    item of data.

                                                                    Note: Panel selection is a local setting, and therefore only affects
                                                                    the individual display that you are currently using. It does not
                                                                    affect any networked displays.



                                                                   List of pre-configured data panels
                                                                   A range of pre-configured panels show commonly used data.
                                                                   The following table shows the data displayed by each type of panel.
                                                                   Each data item listed in the table below represents a 'cell'.

                                                                    Note: Panel selection is a local setting, and therefore only affects
                                                                    the individual display that you are currently using. It does not
                                                                    affect any networked displays.

                                                                   In the following table, Y=YES, N=NO.

                                                                                                Way-                    Fish-      Sail-
                                                                                  Naviga-       point        Route      ing        ing
                                                                    Data          tion panel    panel        panel      panel      panel
                                                                    Vessel        Y             Y            Y          Y          N
                                                                    Position
                                                                    Active        Y             Y            Y          Y          N
                                                                    Waypoint
                                                                    TTG           Y             N            N          N          N


176                                                                                                        C-Series Widescreen user reference
                                Way-               Fish-   Sail-      i.   Press and hold the PAGE button until the Select Page Set
                   Naviga-      point    Route     ing     ing             dialog is displayed.
 Data              tion panel   panel    panel     panel   panel      ii. Using the trackpad, select a page set that includes the Data
                                                                           Application, and press the OK button.
 VMG --            Y            N        N         N       Y
                                                                      iii. If the Data Application is not listed, press the EDIT PAGE
 Waypoint
                                                                           SET softkey, and follow the on-screen instructions.
 Depth             Y            N        Y         Y       N       2. Make the data application the active window:
                                                                      i. Press the ACTIVE button until the red rectangle surrounds
 Cog Sog           Y            Y        Y         Y       Y
                                                                           the Data Application window.
 Heading           Y            N        Y         Y       Y       3. Select the required data panel:
                                                                      i. Using the softkeys, select the pre-configured data panel you
 Speed             Y            N        N         Y       Y
                                                                           want to configure.
 Set/Drift         Y            N        N         Y       N
 XTE               Y            Y        Y         N       N
 Trip              Y            N        N         N       N
 Local Time        Y            N        N         N       N
 Sea               N            N        N         Y       N
 Temperature
 Ground Wind       N            N        N         N       Y
 App Wind          N            N        N         N       Y
 True Wind         N            N        N         N       Y
 VMG Wind          N            N        N         N       Y




Selecting a pre-configured data panel
1. Select a page set that includes the data application:



Using the data application                                                                                                         177
14.3 Customizing the data application                                     6. Press the trackpad right to select the relevant data type for that
                                                                             particular data.
You can customize the data application to show the system and             7. Press the OK button.
instrument data that you require.
In addition to displaying the default, pre-configured data panels in
the data application, you can also customize the data panels to           Renaming data panels in the data application
your specific requirements.
                                                                          1. Press the MENU button.
You can customize each data panel by changing:
                                                                          2. Using the trackpad, select the data panel that you want to
· The panel name.                                                            rename (for example, 'Navigation' panel).
                                                                          3. Press the RENAME PANEL softkey.
· The size and number of data panels.
                                                                          4. Press the RENAME PANEL softkey.
· The data contained in each data panel. This data can include any        5. Using the trackpad, enter the new name for the data panel.
  transducer or internally calculated navigation data that is available   6. Press the OK button.
  on NMEA or SeaTalk. Additional data includes a compass rose, a
  distance log, and four resettable trip counters.
· How the data is displayed. You can control whether the data             Changing the size of data panels in the data
  is displayed in numerals, digits, gauge, or graphical format, as        application
  appropriate for each data item.
                                                                          1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                          2. Using the trackpad, select the data panel that you want to resize
Selecting customized data in the data                                        (for example, 'Navigation' panel).
application                                                               3. Press the MERGE CELLS softkey if you want to merge the
                                                                             contents of the cell with an adjacent cell, resulting in a bigger cell.
In the data application:                                                  4. Press the SPLIT CELL softkey if you want to split the size of
1. Press the MENU button.                                                    the cell in half, and the contents of an adjacent cell to occupy
                                                                             the same panel.
2. Using the trackpad, select the data panel that you want to
   customize (for example, 'Navigation' panel).                           5. Press the OK button.
3. Using the trackpad, move the red rectangle until it surrounds
   the cell you want to customize.
4. Press the SELECT DATA softkey.
5. Using the trackpad, select the Data Group and Data you want
   to see in the cell you selected.


178                                                                                                                 C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 15: Using the weather application (North America only)

Chapter contents
·    15.1 Weather application overview on page 180
·    15.2 Weather application setup on page 180
·    15.3 Weather application display overview on page 181
·    15.4 Weather map navigation on page 185
·    15.5 Weather reports on page 185
·    15.6 Storm tracking on page 186
·    15.7 Animated weather graphics on page 187




Using the weather application (North America only)               179
15.1 Weather application overview                                       15.2 Weather application setup
The weather application overlays historical, live, and forecasted       A number of steps must be completed before you can use the
weather graphics on a world map.                                        weather application for the first time.
The weather application can only be used in North America and           · Obtain a Sirius ID number, by contacting Sirius and subscribing to
its coastal waters.                                                       a weather and/or audio service package. Before subscribing, you
The weather application graphics and their associated weather data        must first record your data and/or audio Electronic Serial Number
enable you to determine the actual conditions in the vicinity of your     (ESN). This number is located on the weather receiver shipping
vessel, or at a particular location.                                      carton, or on the back of the weather receiver itself. For more
                                                                          information, refer to www.sirius.com.
Weather forecasts and warnings, detailing both current and
predicted conditions, are regularly updated in the weather              · Your multifunction display must be connected to a Raymarine
application.                                                              SR100 Sirius weather receiver.

 Note: For types of warnings, watches, and advisories, refer to         · You must be navigating within US coastal waters.
 the NOAA website at www.nws.noaa.gov                                   · The weather application must be added to a page set.
                                                                        · You must specify the weather graphics that you want to display on
Disclaimer -- advisory only
                                                                          the weather map.
The weather information is subject to service interruptions
and may contain errors or inaccuracies and consequently
should not be relied upon exclusively. You are urged to check           Adding the weather application to a page set
alternate weather information sources prior to making safety
related decisions. You acknowledge and agree that you                   1. Press and hold the PAGE button for three seconds, until the
shall be solely responsible for use of the information and all             Select Page Set window appears.
decisions taken with respect thereto. By using this service,            2. Using the trackpad, highlight the page set that you want to add
you release and waive any claims against Sirius Satellite Radio            the application to.
Inc., WSI, Navcast Incorporated, and Raymarine with regard              3. Press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey to edit the highlighted page
to this service.                                                           set.
If you do not have the subscription agreement, you may view a copy      4. Press the softkey associated with the application page that you
on the internet at www.sirius.com/marineweather                            want the weather application to use.
                                                                        5. Using the trackpad, select a page layout style.
                                                                        6. Press the OK button.
                                                                        7. Using the trackpad, highlight the weather application in the list.



180                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
8. Press the OK button.                                             15.3 Weather application display
                                                                    overview
Selecting weather graphics                                          The weather application displays a range of graphics to indicate
In the weather application:                                         weather conditions and forecast information.
                                                                    The following diagram illustrates the main features of the weather
1. Press the DISPLAY GRAPHICS softkey.                              application display:
2. Using the trackpad, select the ON option for each graphic that
                                                                       Range                     Animation time/data                           Signal strength
   you want displayed on the weather map.
3. Press the OK button.                                                 2400 nm                       12:00 22/11                                  Medium        Status
                                                                                                                                                                 bar

                                                                                                                                                                 Marine
                                                                                                                                                                 zone




                                                                                                                                                                 Surface
                                                                                                                                                                 observation
                                                                                                                                                                 stations



                                                                                                                                                                 Wave
                                                                                                                                                                 heights



                                                                                        DISPLA Y           ANIMATE           WEATHER
                                                                           FIND SHIP                                                        PRESENT ATION...
                                                                                       GRAPHICS ...       WEATHER...        REPOR TS . ..




                                                                                                                                                                               D8564_1
                                                                                                        Weather soft keys

                                                                    When you move the cursor over the graphics in the display,
                                                                    additional information is shown. The type of graphics that appear in
                                                                    the display are described in the following sections.


                                                                    Weather symbols
                                                                    The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent


Using the weather application (North America only)                                                                                                                         181
different weather conditions and forecasts.


           24               26                                                                            Hurricane (Category 1-5)             Tropical storm               Tropical disturbance
                                                                                                                                                                                               ,
                                                                                                                                                                            tropical depression
             22           22

             Storm cast                     Waves            Canadian radar (Dark greens-yellow)
                                       (See waves section)
                                                                                                   Surface pressure symbols
                                             Or                                                    The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
                                                                                                   different surface pressure conditions.

             Lightning                       Wind                 Sea surface temperature
                                                                   ( green-yellow-orange)




                                                                                                     High / low pressure (blue & red)      Warm front (red)                  Cold front (blue)



  Surface observ
               ation stations (pink)      Cities (grey)         NOWRad (green-yellow-red)
                                                                Snow (Blues),Mixture (Pinks)
                                                                                                         Occluded front (purple)        Stationary front (red-blue)          Trough (brown)
                                                                                                                                                                                      1010



                                                                                                                                                                               1012

                                                                                                            Squall line (red)                 Dry line (red)                  Isobars (grey)
Storm tracks symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
different types of storm tracks.
                                                                                                   Surface observation station symbols
                                                                                                   The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
                                                                                                   different types of surface obervation station.


182                                                                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
 All surface observ
                  ations stations are representedby a pink symbol:
                                                                                                                         different types of wave information.

                                                                                                                          Wa ve height r anges




                                                                                                             D8975-1
 Buoy Station                   C - MAN                          WSI                           NWS
                                                                                                                                                                  Waves shown in
                                                                                                                                           Florida                16 shades of colour from:
                                                                                                                                                                  Reds - Highest w aves
                                                                                                                                                                  Greens - Intermediate waves
                                                                                                                                                                  Blues - Lowest w aves
Wind speed symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
different wind speeds.

Wind speed symbols
                                                                                                                                                     Cuba




                                                                                                                                                                                                   D8603_1
    3-7 kts   8-12 kts 13-17 kts 18-22 kts 23-27 kts 28-32 kts 33-37 kts 38-42 kts 43-47 kts 48-52 kts




                                                                                                      etc.


    53-57 kts 58-62 kts 63-67 kts 68-72 kts 73-77 kts 78-82 kts 83-87 kts 88-92 kts 93-97 kts 98-102 kts       D8571_1




                                                                                                                                                                                                 D10850-1
                                                                                                                                  Wave Period                   Wave Direction

Wave information symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent

Using the weather application (North America only)                                                                                                                                              183
                                                                  Color code                           Intensity in mm per hour
                                                                  Transparent (nothing shown at very   0.00 to 0.20 mm/hr
NOWRad precipitation color codes                                  low precipitation)
                                                                  Light green                          0.21 to 1.00 mm/hr
NOWRad displays the type and level of precipitation:
                                                                  Medium green                         1.01 to 4.00 mm/hr
 Color code            Precipitation type    Intensity
                                                                  Dark green                           4.01 to 12.00 mm/hr
 Light green           Rain                  (15 to 19 dBz)
                                                                  Yellow                               12.01 to 24.00 mm/hr
 Medium green          Rain                  (20 to 29 dBz)
                                                                  Orange                               24.01 to 50.00 mm/hr
 Dark Green            Rain                  (30 to 39 dBz)
                                                                  Light red                            50.01 to 100 mm/hr
 Yellow                Rain                  (40 to 44 dBz)
                                                                  Dark red                             100.01+ mm/hr
 Orange                Rain                  (45 to 49 dBz)
 Light red             Rain                  (50 to 54 dBz)
 Dark red              Rain                  (55+ dBz)
 Light blue            Snow                  (5 to 19 dBz)
 Dark blue             Snow                  (20+ dBz)
 Light pink            Mixed                 (5 to 19 dBz)
 Dark pink             Mixed                 (20+ dBz)




Canadian radar precipitation color codes
Canadian radar shows the intensity of precipitation for Canada.
Unlike NOWRad, Canadian radar does not show the precipitation
type.


184                                                                                                        C-Series Widescreen user reference
15.4 Weather map navigation                                               15.5 Weather reports
You can move around the weather map and place waypoints.                  You can view a number of different weather reports to give you a
                                                                          comprehensive view of the weather.
When you open the weather application, a world map is displayed.
If the system has a position fix for your boat, the map will be centred   Your multifunction display shows weather reports for:
on your boat. As in the chart application, use the cursor to move
around the map and view different locations, and the Range control        · Tropical statements.
to zoom in and out. Use the WPTS MOB button to place waypoints.           · Marine warnings.
                                                                          · Marine zone forecasts.
Re-centering your vessel on the weather map                               · Marine watchbox warnings.

In the weather application:                                               Tropical statements
1. Press the FIND SHIP softkey.                                           Tropical statements provide information on tropical weather
                                                                          conditions. This information may not be available in all areas.

                                                                          Marine warnings
                                                                          You can display a report for the current marine warnings in the US
                                                                          coastal or near shore areas, or for the zone around your cursor
                                                                          or vessel.

                                                                          Marine zone forecasts
                                                                          These forecasts cover:
                                                                          · US Coastal Weather Forecasts and Offshore Forecasts and High
                                                                            Seas Forecast, or
                                                                          · Great Lakes Forecast and Near Shore Forecast, or
                                                                          · Canadian Coastal Weather Forecast.

                                                                          Marine watchbox warnings
                                                                          When a tornado or thunderstorm warning is received within the
                                                                          specified range of your vessel (MENU > Weather Setup Menu >
                                                                          Marine Watchbox Alerts), the system generates a watchbox alert.
                                                                          This alert provides information on the type of warning and validity
                                                                          period. The full watchbox report text is also displayed.
Using the weather application (North America only)                                                                                          185
Displaying weather reports                                  15.6 Storm tracking
In the weather application:                                 The storm tracking function enables you to monitor significant
                                                            storms in the area.
1. Press the WEATHER REPORTS softkey.
2. Press the TROPICAL STATEMENTS, MARINE WARNINGS,          Examples of significant storms include tropical disturbances,
   MARINE ZONE FORECASTS, or MATCHBOX WARNINGS              depressions, storms and cyclones, hurricanes, typhoons, and super
   softkey, as appropriate.                                 typhoons.
The relevant report, warning, or statement is displayed.    The weather map displays the track that the storm has taken, its
                                                            current and forecasted position, the wind radii (current position
                                                            only), direction, and speed of travel.
Changing the position of forecasts on the                   Storm tracks are highlighted on the weather map in the form of
weather map                                                 symbols, as shown below.

In the weather application:                                 When you move the cursor over a symbol, additional storm
                                                            information is displayed.
1. Press the WEATHER REPORTS softkey.
2. Press the FORECAST AT softkey until the CURSOR or SHIP
   option is selected, as appropriate.

 Note: You cannot change the position of TROPICAL                Hurricane (Category 1-5)   Tropical storm               Tropical disturbance
                                                                                                                                            ,
                                                                                                                         tropical depression
 STATEMENTS or WATCHBOX WARNINGS.




186                                                                                                          C-Series Widescreen user reference
15.7 Animated weather graphics
You can view animated weather graphics to provide an indication
of changing weather patterns.
The animated weather option enables you to view an animation
from the current time for:
· The forecast for wind, wave, or surface pressure.
· The weather radar history loop (NOWRad).


Running a weather animation
In the weather application:
1. Press the ANIMATE WEATHER softkey.
2. Press the ANIMATE TYPE softkey until the F'CAST (forecast) or
   N'RAD (NOWRad) option is selected, as appropriate.
3. If the F'CAST option is selected, press the FORECAST softkey
   until the WIN (wind), WAV (waves), or PRES (pressure) option is
   selected, as appropriate.
4. Press the ANIMATE softkey until the ON option is selected.
5. Press the OK button.

 Note: You cannot display information (by moving the cursor over
 a symbol) when animation is running. The range and trackpad
 controls do however remain operable provided the PAUSE option
 has not been selected. Ranging /panning will cause the animation
 to restart.

 Note: The animation will be switched to OFF, whenever the
 ACTIVE, PAGE, DATA, WPTS MOB, or MENU buttons are
 pressed, or when the animation screen is closed and you return
 to the default weather screen.



Using the weather application (North America only)                   187
188   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 16: Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)

Chapter contents
·    16.1 Sirius radio overview on page 190
·    16.2 Displaying the Sirius radio application on page 190
·    16.3 Sirius radio basic operations on page 191
·    16.4 Sirius radio presets on page 192
·    16.5 Favorite Sirius radio song alerts on page 193
·    16.6 Sirius radio parental locking on page 194




Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)               189
16.1 Sirius radio overview                                               16.2 Displaying the Sirius radio
You can use your multifunction display to control a connected Sirius
                                                                         application
Satellite Radio receiver.
                                                                         1. Press the MENU button.
Your multifunction display provides access to basic and advanced         2. Using the trackpad, select the Sirius Satellite Radio menu item.
audio functions on a connected Sirius Satellite Radio receiver.          The Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog is displayed:
The Sirius Satellite Radio service is only available in North America.
From your multifunction display, you can:
· Tune to a Sirius radio channel.
· Browse a Sirius radio channel without tuning to it.
· Scan for Sirius radio channels (tune to all channels in turn).
· Set up Sirius radio presets for fast access to commonly used
  channels.
· Set up a parental lock on a Sirius radio channel.
· Receive alerts for favorite songs and artists.




190                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
16.3 Sirius radio basic operations                                      Scanning Sirius radio channels
You can tune, scan, and browse Sirius Radio channels using your         In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:
multifunction display
                                                                        1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
The basic operations of your Sirius Satellite Radio receiver that can   2. Using the trackpad, select SCAN CHANNELS.
be controlled from your multifunction display are:
                                                                        3. Press the SCAN ALL/PRE softkey to scan all channels, or only
· Tuning -- using the trackpad, you can tune to the previous or next       preset channels.
  channel, and the first channel in the previous or next category.      4. Press the SELECT softkey to stop the scan and listen to the
                                                                           active channel.
· Browsing -- allows you to view play data for radio channels
  without actually tuning to them.
· Scanning -- automatically tunes to all channels in turn.              Showing or hiding Sirius radio channels
                                                                        In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:
Tuning to a Sirius radio channel                                        1.   Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:                           2.   Using the trackpad, select the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS option.
                                                                        3.   Using the trackpad, select the channel you want to hide.
1. Press the trackpad right to tune to the next available channel.      4.   Press the CHANNEL SHOWN and CHANNEL HIDDEN softkeys
2. Press the trackpad left to tune to the previous channel.                  to toggle between show and hide.
3. Press the trackpad up to tune to the first channel in the previous
   category.
4. Press the trackpad down to tune to the first channel in the next
   category.


Browsing Sirius radio channels
In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:
1. Press the BROWSE softkey.
   The Channel List or Preset List is displayed.
2. Using the trackpad, scroll through the available channels.
3. Press the TUNE TO CHANNEL softkey to listen to the selected
   channel.
Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)                                                                                    191
16.4 Sirius radio presets                                           4. Using the trackpad, select the target channel

You can assign up to 18 Sirius Radio channels to presets to make
it easier to find commonly used channels.                           Deleting a Sirius radio channel from a preset
Each channel must be assigned to a different preset. You can also
                                                                    In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:
move channels between presets, and delete existing presets.
The following screenshot shows the Sirius Radio Preset List:        1. Press the PRESETS softkey.
                                                                       The Preset List is displayed.
                                                                    2. Using the trackpad, select the preset you want to delete the
                                                                       channel from.
                                                                    3. Press the DELETE CHANNEL softkey.


                                                                    Moving a Sirius radio channel to another preset
                                                                    In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:
                                                                    1. Press the PRESETS softkey.
                                                                       The Preset List is displayed.
                                                                    2. Using the trackpad, select the preset that contains the channel
                                                                       you want to move.
                                                                    3. Press the MOVE TO NEW PRESET softkey.
                                                                    4. Using the trackpad, select the preset you want to move the
                                                                       channel to.
                                                                    5. Press the MOVE TO NEW PRESET softkey.
Assigning Sirius radio channel presets
In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:
1. Press the PRESETS softkey.
   The Preset List is displayed.
2. Using the trackpad, select an unused preset number from the
   Preset List.
3. Press the ASSIGN NEW CHANNEL softkey.

192                                                                                                          C-Series Widescreen user reference
16.5 Favorite Sirius radio song alerts                                 2. Press the ALERTS ON/OFF softkey repeatedly until the ON
                                                                          option is selected.
The favorites feature alerts you when a favorite song or artist is     3. Press the ADD SONG or ADD ARTIST softkey, as appropriate.
playing on any Sirius Radio channel.
When favorite alerts are enabled and a favorite song or artist is
played on any channel, an alert is displayed and an alarm sounds.
You can define up to 10 favorite songs or artists.
The following screenshot shows an example of a Sirius radio song
alert:




Setting up Sirius radio favorite alerts
In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog when your favorite song
or artist is playing:
1. Press the ALERTS softkey.
    The Edit Alerts dialog is displayed.

Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)                                                                                193
16.6 Sirius radio parental locking                                      Blocking a Sirius radio channel
You can block certain Sirius Radio channels to prevent unauthorised     In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:
access.
                                                                        1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
When you enable the "Parental Locking" function, you can assign a       2. Press the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS softkey.
password to a channel to restrict access to it.
                                                                           The Channel List is displayed.
Subsequently, it will not be possible to listen to the channel unless
the correct password is entered first.                                  3. Using the trackpad, select the channel you want to block access
                                                                           to.
                                                                        4. Press the CHANNEL ENABLED/LOCKED softkey repeatedly
Setting up Sirius radio parental locking                                   until the LOCKED option is selected.
                                                                        5. Repeat Steps 3 to 4 for each channel you want to block.
In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:                           6. Press the CLEAR softkey.
1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.                                    7. Press the PARENTAL LOCK softkey repeatedly until the ON
2. Press the PARENTAL LOCK softkey repeatedly until the ON                 option is selected.
   option is selected.                                                  8. At the prompt, enter your password.
                                                                        Blocked channels remain visible in channel lists, but you cannot
   The Password Setup dialog is displayed.                              select them with the trackpad, and they are ignored by the scan
3. Using the trackpad, enter and confirm your password and hint.        function. Blocked channels are marked as locked by an icon next to
4. Press theOK button.                                                  the channel name.


Changing the Sirius radio password                                      Accessing a blocked Sirius radio channel
In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:                           In the Sirius Satellite Radio control dialog:

1.    Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.                                 1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS or BROWSE softkey to find the
2.    Press the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS softkey.                               blocked channel.
3.    Press the EDIT LOCKOUT PASSWORD softkey.                              When you select a blocked channel, you are prompted for your
4.    Using the trackpad, enter your old password.                          password.
5.    Using the trackpad, enter your new password and password hint.    2. Using the trackpad, enter your password.
6.    Press the OK button.                                              3. Press the OK button.
                                                                        If you enter an incorrect password more than 3 times, your password
                                                                        hint is displayed.


194                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 17: Using Navtex

Chapter contents
·    17.1 Navtex overview on page 196
·    17.2 Navtex setup on page 196
·    17.3 Viewing and Managing Navtex Messages on page 197




Using Navtex                                                 195
17.1 Navtex overview                                                  17.2 Navtex setup
The Navtex features enable you to view marine safety information,     In order to receive Navtex alerts on your multifunction display, you
including weather forecasts and marine safety warnings.               must connect a Navtex receiver and configure the NMEA options on
With a suitable Navtex receiver connected to your multifunction       your multifunction display.
display, you can view marine safety information, including weather    Before you are able to receive and view Navtex safety messages on
forecasts and marine warnings.                                        your multifunction display, you must:
Major areas of NAVTEX coverage include the Mediterranean Sea,         · Connect a suitable Navtex receiver to your multifunction display.
The North Sea, coastal areas around Japan, and areas around the
North American continent.                                             · Specify the appropriate baud rate for the relevant NMEA port on
                                                                        your multifunction display (MENU > System Setup > System
Incoming Navtex Message Alerts                                          Integration). You must select the Navtex 4800 or Navtex 9600
                                                                        option if you want to view the Navtex Message List.
Whenever a warning is received by the Navtex receiver, an alert
is displayed on your multifunction display for any category of        · Select the appropriate category of Navtex message that you want
information that you have set up. The alert contains the message        to receive alerts for.
details, and can be erased or saved.
Your multifunction display stores up to 100 messages. Once
capacity is reached, the oldest messages are automatically deleted
to allow for new incoming messages.

Navtex Message Alert Categories
You can configure your multifunction display to show alerts for a
range of different categories of information, including warnings,
reports and services. Examples include navigational warnings, ice
reports, search and rescue information, metereological warnings,
and special services.
These categories are set up using the Navtex Message List.
Selecting the appropriate categories from the list ensures that you
only receive warnings and information that are relevant to you.




196                                                                                                          C-Series Widescreen user reference
17.3 Viewing and Managing Navtex                                     2. Press the SORT LIST softkey until the DATE, STN (Station
                                                                        Identifier), or CAT (Category) option is selected, as appropriate.
Messages

Viewing a Navtex message                                             Selecting Navtex message alert categories
                                                                     In the chart or radar application:
In the chart or radar application:
                                                                     1. Display the Navtex Message List:
1. Display the Navtex Message List:
                                                                        i. Using the trackpad, select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu
   i. Using the trackpad, select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu                    item.
       item.
                                                                        ii. Press the trackpad right to view the list.
   ii. Press the trackpad right to view the list.
                                                                     2. Press the SETUP ALERTS softkey.
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the message in the list that you
   want to view.                                                     3. Using the trackpad, highlight the category that you want to
                                                                        receive alerts for.
3. Press the trackpad right to switch focus to the message display
   dialog.                                                           4. Press the trackpad right to select the receive status to ON or
                                                                        OFF, as appropriate.
4. Use the trackpad to scroll the message details if required.
                                                                     5. Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each category you want to receive alerts
                                                                        for.
Displaying the Navtex message list
In the chart or radar application:
1. Press theMENU button.
2. Using the trackpad, select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu item.
3. Press the trackpad right to view the list.


Sorting the Navtex message list
In the chart or radar application:
1. Display the Navtex Message List:
   i. Using the trackpad, select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu
       item.
   ii. Press the trackpad right to view the list.

Using Navtex                                                                                                                            197
198   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 18: Using video

Chapter contents
·    18.1 Video application overview on page 200
·    18.2 Displaying the video application on page 201
·    18.3 Changing the video aspect ratio on page 201
·    18.4 Adjusting the video picture on page 202




Using video                                              199
18.1 Video application overview                                                Note: For information on connecting the video source, and
                                                                               compatible input configurations, refer to the Installation Guide.
You can view a video or camera source on your multifunction display.
The video application enables you to connect a video source directly
to your multifunction display, and view the image on the screen.
If required, you can adjust the brightness, contrast, color, and aspect
ratio of the video.
The following image shows an example of a camera feed displayed
in the video application:




                                                                     D7493_2




 Note: You can only view the video on the multifunction display
 that the video source is directly connected to. You cannot view
 the video on any additional connected displays.




200                                                                                                                   C-Series Widescreen user reference
18.2 Displaying the video application                                 18.3 Changing the video aspect ratio
1. Press and hold the PAGE button for three seconds, until the        In the video application:
   Select Page Set window appears.
                                                                      1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the page set that you want to add
   the application to.                                                2. Press the ASPECT RATIO softkey repeatedly until the
                                                                         appropriate setting is selected.
3. Press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey to edit the highlighted page
   set.                                                               3. Press the OK button.
4. Press the softkey associated with the application page that you
   want the video application to use.
5. Using the trackpad, select a page layout style.
6. Press the OK button.
7. Using the trackpad, highlight the video application in the list.
8. Press the OK button.




Using video                                                                                                                    201
18.4 Adjusting the video picture
In the video application:
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Press the CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, or COLOR softkey, as
   appropriate.
3. Using the trackpad, adjust the level as required.
4. Press the OK button.




202                                                       C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 19: DSC VHF radio integration

Chapter contents
·    19.1 Using a DSC VHF radio with your display on page 204
·    19.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration on page 205




DSC VHF radio integration                                       203
19.1 Using a DSC VHF radio with your
display
You can connect your DSC VHF radio to your multifunction display
and show distress message information and GPS position data for
other vessels.
Connecting a DSC VHF radio to your multifunction display provides
the following additional functionality:
· Distress Messages -- when your DSC VHF radio receives a
  DSC message or alarm from another DSC VHF radio-equipped
  vessel, the vessel identification (MMSI), GPS position, and time
  of distress message is displayed on your multifunction display.
  You can use the softkeys on your multifunction display to clear the
  message, place a waypoint on the chart at the GPS position of
  the distressed vessel, or immediately start navigating (GOTO) to
  the GPS position.
· Position Data -- the "Position Request" button on your DSC VHF
  radio enables you to send and receive GPS position data to and
  from other vessels equipped with a DSC VHF radio.
For information on installing and operating your DSC VHF radio,
refer to the handbook that accompanies the radio.
The following image shows an example of a distress message
displayed on a multifunction display:




204                                                                     C-Series Widescreen user reference
19.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration
To configure your multifunction display to show messages from your
DSC VHF radio:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the System Setup menu item, then
   press the trackpad right to select it.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the System Integration menu
   item, then press the trackpad right to select it.
4. Using the trackpad, highlight the DSC Message menu item, then
   press the trackpad right to select the ON option.
5. Press the OK button.




DSC VHF radio integration                                            205
206   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 20: Customizing your display

Chapter contents
·    20.1 Customizing page sets on page 208
·    20.2 Customizing the databar on page 209




Customizing your display                        207
20.1 Customizing page sets                                               8. If you have chosen a page layout featuring multiple applications,
                                                                            press the ACTIVE button to toggle between the windows (the
You can change the applications that are available in each page set         currently selected window is highlighted in red) .
to give you quick access to commonly-used functions.                     9. Press the OK button to select the highlighted application for
Your multifunction display features five different page sets, each one      that page.
featuring a different combination of applications. Your multifunction
display features a default collection of page sets, each providing a
different combination of applications. These default page sets can       Renaming a page set
be customized to suit different activities and needs. For example,
you could set up a page set that features the chart application          1. Press and hold the PAGE button until the Select Page Set dialog
on one page, the radar application on a second page, and the                is displayed.
fishfinder on a third page. You could then quickly swap between the      2. Using the trackpad, highlight the page set that you want to
applications using the PAGE button on your multifunction display.           rename.
Additionally, you can also set up pages that feature multiple            3. Press the RENAME PAGE SET softkey.
windows. For example, you could set up a page containing two             4. Using the trackpad, enter the new name for the page set.
windows, each displaying a chart application -- one window               5. Press the OK button.
featuring a large-scale view, and the other window featuring a more
detailed view of your immediate surroundings.


Selecting applications for a page set
1. Press and hold the PAGE button for three seconds, until the
   Select Page Set window appears.
2. Using the rotary encoder or trackpad, highlight the page set that
   you want to customize.
3. Press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey to edit the highlighted page
   set.
4. Press the softkey associated with the page set you wish to edit.
5. Using the rotary encoder or trackpad, highlight the page layout
   style that you want for the page set.
6. Press the OK button.
7. Using the rotary encoder or trackpad, highlight the application
   that you want to use for that page.


208                                                                                                             C-Series Widescreen user reference
20.2 Customizing the databar                                               ii. Using the trackpad, select the data group that contains the
                                                                                type of data you want to add.
                                                                           iii. Press the trackpad right to select a data element from the
Moving the databar                                                              data group.
                                                                           iv. Press the trackpad right to select an appropriate data type
1. Press the DATA button.                                                       for the data.
2. Press and hold the DATABAR softkey until the Database Setup             v. Press the OK button.
   Menu dialog is displayed.                                            3. To move data in the databar:
3. Using the trackpad, select the Position menu item.                      i. Using the trackpad, move the red rectangle in the databar
4. Using the trackpad, select the Top or Side option, as appropriate.           until it surrounds the item of data that you want to move.
5. Press the OK button.                                                    ii. Press the MOVE DATA softkey until it is highlighted.
                                                                           iii. Using the trackpad, move the item of data to the desired
                                                                                position in the databar.
Resizing the databar                                                       iv. Press the OK button.
                                                                        4. To remove a data item from the databar:
1. Press the DATA button.
                                                                           i. Using the trackpad, move the red rectangle in the databar
2. Press and hold the DATABAR softkey until the Database Setup
                                                                                until it surrounds the item of data that you want to remove.
   Menu dialog is displayed.
                                                                           ii. Press the REMOVE DATA softkey until it is highlighted.
3. Using the trackpad, select the Databar Size menu item.
                                                                           iii. Press the OK button.
4. Using the trackpad, select the Normal or Large option, as
   appropriate.
5. Press the OK button.


Changing the data displayed in the databar
1. Select the Databar Setup Menu:
   i. Press the DATA button.
   ii. Press and hold the DATABAR softkey until the Database
        Setup Menu dialog is displayed.
   iii. Using the trackpad, select the Configure menu item.
2. To add data to the databar:
   i. Press the ADD DATA softkey.



Customizing your display                                                                                                                   209
210   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 21: Maintaining your display

Chapter contents
·    21.1 Servicing and safety on page 212
·    21.2 Routine equipment checks on page 212
·    21.3 Cleaning on page 213
·    21.4 Cleaning the display case on page 213
·    21.5 Cleaning the display screen on page 214
·    21.6 Resetting your display on page 214




Maintaining your display                            211
21.1 Servicing and safety                                              21.2 Routine equipment checks
Your Raymarine product must be serviced by authorized personnel        Raymarine strongly recommends that you complete a number of
to ensure effective and safe performance.                              routine checks to ensure the correct and reliable operation of your
                                                                       equipment.
· Raymarine equipment must be serviced only by authorized
  Raymarine service technicians. They will ensure that service         Complete the following checks on a regular basis:
  procedures and any replacement parts used will not affect            · Examine all cables for signs of damage or wear and tear.
  performance. There are no user serviceable parts in any
  Raymarine product.                                                   · Check that all cables are securely connected.
· Some products generate high voltages, so never handle the
  cables or connectors when power is being supplied to the
  equipment.
· When powered on, all electrical equipment produces
  electromagnetic fields. These fields can cause adjacent pieces of
  electrical equipment to interact with one another, with an adverse
  effect on operation. In order to minimize these effects and enable
  you to get the best possible performance from your Raymarine
  equipment, guidelines are given in the installations manual.
  These guidelines enable you to ensure minimum interaction
  between different items of equipment, and achieve optimum
  Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).
· Always report any EMC-related problem to your nearest
  Raymarine dealer. We use such information to improve our
  quality standards.
· In some installations, it may not be possible to prevent the
  equipment from being affected by external influences. Generally
  this will not damage the display, but it can lead to spurious
  re-setting action, or momentarily may result in faulty operation.
· At the end of the useful working life of this product, it should
  disposed of in accordance with local regulations.




212                                                                                                           C-Series Widescreen user reference
21.3 Cleaning                                                21.4 Cleaning the display case
Best cleaning practices.                                     The display unit is a sealed unit and does not require regular
                                                             cleaning. If it is necessary to clean the unit, follow this basic
When cleaning this product:                                  procedure:
· Do NOT wipe the display screen with a dry cloth, as this   1. Switch off the power to the display.
  could scratch the screen coating.
                                                             2. Wipe the display with a clean, soft cloth (a microfibre cloth is
· Do NOT use abrasive, or acid or ammonia based products.       ideal).
                                                             3. If necessary, use isopropyl alcohol (IPA) or a mild detergent to
· Do NOT use a jet wash.
                                                                remove grease marks.

                                                              Note: Do NOT use IPA or any other solvent or detergent on the
                                                              screen itself.

                                                              Note: In certain conditions, condensation may appear inside the
                                                              display screen. This will not harm the unit, and can be cleared by
                                                              powering on the display for a short time.




Maintaining your display                                                                                                         213
21.5 Cleaning the display screen                                        21.6 Resetting your display
A coating is applied to the display screen. This makes it water         Your display may be reset to its factory default settings if required.
repellent, and prevents glare. To avoid damaging this coating, follow   Your multifunction display may be restored to its factory default
this procedure:                                                         settings.
1. Switch off the power to the display.                                 There are two types of reset operation:
2. Rinse the screen with fresh water to remove all dirt particles
   and salt deposits.                                                   · Settings reset.
3. Allow the screen to dry naturally.                                   · Settings and data reset.
4. If any smears remain, very gently wipe the screen with a clean
   microfibre cleaning cloth (available from an opticians).             Settings reset
                                                                        This option resets your setup menus, page sets, and databar
                                                                        settings to factory default. It will NOT affect your waypoints, routes,
                                                                        or tracks data.

                                                                        Settings and data reset
                                                                        In addition to the settings reset detailed above, performing a settings
                                                                        and data reset will also remove ALL waypoints, routes, and tracks
                                                                        data.


                                                                        Performing a settings reset
                                                                        1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                        2. Using the trackpad, highlight the System Setup menu item, then
                                                                           press the trackpad right to select it.
                                                                        3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Settings Reset menu item, then
                                                                           press the trackpad right to select it.
                                                                        4. If you have password-protected your waypoints, enter your
                                                                           waypoint password and press the OK button.




214                                                                                                              C-Series Widescreen user reference
5. Select the YES option to perform the reset, or select the NO
   option to abort.


Performing a settings and data reset
Performing a settings and data reset erases ALL waypoints,
routes, and track data from your multifunction display.
BEFORE proceeding with a settings and data reset, ensure
that you backup any data that you want to keep on to a
CompactFlash card.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the trackpad, highlight the System Setup menu item, then
   press the trackpad right to select it.
3. Using the trackpad, highlight the Settings and Data Reset menu
   item, then press the trackpad right to select it.
4. If you have password-protected your waypoints, enter your
   waypoint password and press the OK button.
5. Select the YES option to perform the reset, or select the NO
   option to abort.




Maintaining your display                                            215
216   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Chapter 22: Technical support

Chapter contents
·    22.1 Raymarine technical support on page 218
·    22.2 Sirius support on page 218
·    22.3 Navionics support on page 219




Technical support                                   217
22.1 Raymarine technical support                                        22.2 Sirius support
Web support                                                             Sirius marine weather
Please visit the customer support area of our website at:               www.sirius.com/marineweather
www.raymarine.com
                                                                        Sirius audio
This contains Frequently Asked Questions, servicing information,
                                                                        www.sirius.com
e-mail access to the Raymarine Technical Support Department and
details of worldwide Raymarine agents.

Telephone support
In the USA call:
+1 603 881 5200 extension 2444
In the UK, Europe, the Middle East, or Far East call:
+44 (0)23 9271 4713

Product information
If you need to request service, please have the following information
to hand:
· Product name.
· Product identity.
· Serial number.
· Software application version.
You can obtain this product information using the menus within your
product.


Viewing product information
1.    Open the system Setup menu.
2.    Select System Diagnostics.
3.    Select Software Services.
4.    Select the Software Services menu:

218                                                                                                    C-Series Widescreen user reference
22.3 Navionics support
Navionics website
www.navionics.com




Technical support        219
220   C-Series Widescreen user reference
Raymarine plc                Raymarine Inc.
AnchoragePark, Portsmouth,   21 Manchester Street, Merrimack,
HampshirePO3 5TD,            New Hampshire03054-4801,
United Kingdom.              USA.

Tel:+44 (0) 23 9269 3611     Tel:+1 603.881.5200
Fax: +44 (0) 23 9269 4642    Fax: +1 603.864.4756
www.raymarine.com            www.raymarine.com


Ad by Google

Disclaimer:
The information on this web site has not been checked for accuracy. It is for entertainment purposes only and should be independently verified before using for any other reason. There are five sources. 1) Documents and manuals from a variety of sources. These have not been checked for accuracy and in many cases have not even been read by anyone associated with L-36.com. I have no idea of they are useful or accurate, I leave that to the reader. 2) Articles others have written and submitted. If you have questions on these, please contact the author. 3) Articles that represent my personal opinions. These are intended to promote thought and for entertainment. These are not intended to be fact, they are my opinions. 4) Small programs that generate result presented on a web page. Like any computer program, these may and in some cases do have errors. Almost all of these also make simplifying assumptions so they are not totally accurate even if there are no errors. Please verify all results. 5) Weather information is from numerious of sources and is presented automatically. It is not checked for accuracy either by anyone at L-36.com or by the source which is typically the US Government. See the NOAA web site for their disclaimer. Finally, tide and current data on this site is from 2007 and 2008 data bases, which may contain even older data. Changes in harbors due to building or dredging change tides and currents and for that reason many of the locations presented are no longer supported by newer data bases. For example, there is very little tidal current data in newer data bases so current data is likely wrong to some extent. This data is NOT FOR NAVIGATION. See the XTide disclaimer for details. In addition, tide and current are influenced by storms, river flow, and other factors beyond the ability of any predictive program.